JP2019103539A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a technique in which an efficient control process for setting can be executed.SOLUTION: When receiving a putout activation command transmitted by a putout control device 92 (F02), a main control device 70 returns an activation confirmation command to the putout control device 92 (F03). When receiving the activation confirmation command, the putout control device 92 puts out a game ball after a predetermined time is elapsed (G01), so the main control device 70 transmits a putout operation stop command (setting change/reference start command, prohibit command) before putting out a game ball (F04). The putout control device that has received the putout operation stop command is turned in a putout stop state. Cancellation of the putout stop state is triggered by the putout operation start command (setting change/reference end command). This makes it possible to prevent unintended putout during setting change or setting reference, and software correction of the putout control device is unnecessary by using a "putout operation start command" and "putout operation stop command".SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 15

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game.

  Patent Document 1 describes a pachinko machine in which different jackpot probabilities are set in accordance with set values.

JP-A 5-285258

  Although the prior art is a gaming machine capable of changing settings, control processing relating to settings has room for improvement.

  Then, this invention makes it a subject to provide the technique which can perform the efficient control processing regarding a setting.

  The present invention adopts the following solutions in order to solve the above-mentioned problems. In addition, the wording in the following parenthesis is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this. Further, the present invention can be an invention including at least one of the invention specific matters shown in the following solution means. Furthermore, to each invention specific item shown in the following solution means, an element which limits the invention specific item can be added and subconceptified, and an element which limits the invention specific item can be deleted and superordinated. .

  Solution means 1: The gaming machine of this solution means can communicate with the main control device controlling the content of the game and the main control device, and pays the game ball based on the payout command transmitted from the main control device The main controller is provided with a payout control device to pay out, and when the lottery trigger occurs during the game, a setting change capable of changing a setting relating to at least the probability of winning the predetermined lottery, lottery execution means for executing the predetermined lottery Setting related processing execution means for executing setting related processing including at least one of a device, setting change processing performed when changing the setting, or setting reference processing performed when referring to the setting; The payout control device is not caused to execute payout of the game ball by transmitting a prohibition command for prohibiting the payout of the game ball to the payout control device during execution of the related processing. A game machine characterized by comprising a prohibiting process execution means for executing the stop processing.

The gaming machine of this solution means has the following configuration.
(1) A main control device for controlling the content of the game is provided.
(2) A payout control device capable of communicating with the main control device of the above (1) and discharging the gaming ball based on the payout command transmitted from the main control device of the above (1) is provided. The main controller and the payout controller can communicate with each other.

(3) The main control device of (1) executes a predetermined lottery (special symbol lottery) when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game (when the game ball enters the start winning opening).

(4) The main control device of the above (1) is provided with a setting change device capable of changing at least the setting regarding the winning probability of the predetermined lottery of the above (3). The setting change device is a device for switching settings, which is operated by the operation of a button, a lever or other devices provided in the gaming machine. Also, setting means a combination of actuation probabilities. Furthermore, the operation probability refers to the probability that a combination of symbols for which the condition device is to be activated (a special game will be executed) is displayed.

  The setting change device may be a device capable of changing the setting in which other items are added in addition to the item related to the winning probability of the predetermined lottery in (3). Further, the setting change device may be a device capable of changing the setting related to the ball.

(5) The main control device of the above (1) performs setting related processing including at least one of setting reference processing performed when referring to setting changing processing or setting executed when changing settings. The related processing execution means is provided. The setting related processing includes processing executed during setting change (setting change mode, setting change state) or setting reference (setting reference mode, setting reference state).

(6) The main control device of the above (1) transmits a prohibition command for prohibiting the payout of the game ball to the payout control device of the above (2) while the setting related processing of the above (5) is being executed. Thus, there is provided the prohibition process execution means for executing the prohibition process not to cause the payout control device of (2) to execute the payout of the game ball.

The prohibition command may be a setting change / setting reference start command, or may be a dispensing operation stop command.
The prohibition release command to be paired with the prohibition command may be a setting change / setting reference end command, or may be a payout operation start command.

  As described above, according to the present solution means, since the payout control device does not execute the payout of the gaming ball when the main control device transmits the prohibition command, there are two devices such as the main control device and the payout control device. Nevertheless, the setting of only the main control device can prevent the game balls from being paid out during execution of the setting related process. As a result, correction of the program of the payout control device becomes unnecessary, and the overall control processing can be simplified, and as a result, efficient control processing regarding setting can be performed.

  Further, according to the present solution means, when the gaming machine is provided with the function of the prohibition command (the payout operation stop command) in advance, it is possible to effectively use the game without changing the program of the payout control device. The payout of the ball can be controlled, and efficient control processing regarding setting can be performed.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine of this solution is any of the solutions described above, wherein the payout control device transmits an activation command to the main control device and receives an activation confirmation command for the activation command. Thus, the gaming state is shifted from the non-disbursable state to the dispensable state, and the gaming ball is dispensed based on the payout command transmitted from the main control device in the dispensable state, and the prohibition process execution means sends the payout control device to the payout control device. By transmitting the prohibition command, the payout control device is shifted to the non-payout state, and the payout control device is not caused to execute the payout of the game ball.

The following features are added to this solution.
(1) The payout control device transmits a start command (a payout start command) to the main control device and receives a start confirmation command in response to the start command to shift from the non-disbursable state to the dispensable state, and the dispensable state The game ball is paid out based on the payout command transmitted from the main control device in.

(2) The prohibition process execution means causes the payout control device to shift to the non-payout state by transmitting the prohibition command to the payout control device, and does not cause the payout control device to pay out the game ball.

  According to this solution means, the main control device (prohibition processing execution means) transmits the prohibition command to the payout control device to shift the payout control device to the non-payout state, and the payout control device In order to prevent the payout from being executed, the payout of the payout control device can be easily inhibited simply by the control relating to the command, and efficient control processing regarding the setting can be executed.

  Further, according to the solution means, the payout control device shifts to a state where it can not transmit the command accompanying the transmission of the prohibition command to the payout control device by the main control device (prohibition processing execution means). In this way, on the main control device side, the command is not transmitted from the payout control device during the execution of the setting related processing, so the control processing on the main control device side can be simplified as well. it can.

  Other solution means: In the game machine of this solution means, in any one of the solution means described above, the payout control device can pay out from the non-payout state after a predetermined time has elapsed since receiving the activation confirmation command. After shifting to the state, the prohibition process execution means transmits the prohibition command before the predetermined time elapses after transmitting the activation confirmation command, and the payout control device changes from the non-disbursable state to the dispensable state. It is a gaming machine characterized by restricting migration.

The following features are added to this solution.
(1) The payout control device receives a start confirmation command, and after a predetermined time has elapsed (after 5 seconds), it is possible to pay out from the non-payout state (a state in which the game ball is paid out from the state in which the game ball is not paid out) Migrate to

(2) The main control device (prohibition process execution means) transmits the prohibition command before a predetermined time elapses (5 seconds before) after transmitting the start confirmation command, and the payout control device can pay out from the non-disbursement state Limit the transition to the state (do not shift to the dispensable state).

  In this solution means, the main control device (prohibition process execution means) transmits the prohibition command before a predetermined time elapses after transmitting the activation confirmation command, and the payout control device shifts from the non-disbursable state to the dispensable state In order to limit the situation, it is possible to prevent the payout control device from paying out the game ball without changing the flow of transmission of the start confirmation command, and it is possible to suppress the change of the program of the main control device and to improve the setting efficiency. Good control processing can be performed.

  According to the present invention, efficient control processing relating to setting can be performed.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a game board unit alone. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram showing various electronic equipment with which a pachinko machine was equipped. It is a block diagram which shows the function structure inside the presentation control apparatus. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the memory area which main control CPU72 uses. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a setting value and the winning probability of a special symbol lottery. It is a figure which shows the state of a setting key, the decision | availability of setting change, and the decision | availability of insertion and removal. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st procedure example of CPU initialization processing (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the 1st procedure example of CPU initialization processing (2/2). It is a figure which shows the command transmission timing of the 1st example of a procedure of CPU initialization processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd example of a procedure of CPU initialization processing (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd procedure example of CPU initialization processing (2/2). It is a figure which shows the command transmission timing of the 2nd procedure example of CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of main loop processing. It is a figure which shows the content of the process performed when a serial communication reception interruption generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the content of the process performed when a timer interruption generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the content of the process performed when an interruption generate | occur | produces at the time of a power-down notice. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of serial communication reception interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of interruption processing at the time of a power-off notice. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a dynamic port output process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a performance display monitor output process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between timer interrupt processing and dynamic port output processing. It is a figure which shows the modification of timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a setting change process (1/2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a setting change process (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of switch management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of 1st special symbol memory | storage update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of 2nd special symbol memory | storage update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. 51 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of special game management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of special symbol variation pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a loss time change pattern selection table (low probability * high probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of a loss time change pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of a loss time change pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of a loss time change pattern selection table (special area). It is a figure which shows the structural example of a 1st special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a 2nd special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of a big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability * high probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of a big hit time change pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of a big hit time change pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state). It is a figure showing an example of a big hit time change pattern selection table (special section). It is a flow chart which shows an example of procedure of out-of-time variation pattern determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit time change pattern determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol storage area shift process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of processing under special symbol stop indication. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special change management process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of composition of big hit time variable winning a prize device management processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of big hit time special winning opening opening pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of big hit time big prize mouth opening and closing operation processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of procedure of big hit time big prize mouth closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the number setting process of special variation. It is a flow chart which shows the example of composition of small hit time variable winning a prize device management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of small hit time big prize mouth opening pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of small hit time big prize mouth opening and closing operation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of small hit time big prize mouth closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the small hit time end process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of composition of LED display setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st procedure example of an addition number calculation process. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd example of a procedure of addition number calculation processing. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state and the number of discharge balls. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of performance display monitor control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a ball | bowl number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of performance display monitor total division process. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process of division task 1; It is a flow chart which shows an example of a procedure of processing of division tasks 2-8. 15 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process of division task 9; It is a figure explaining the display mode of the performance display monitor 200. FIG. It is a figure explaining the area of the base displayed on performance display monitor 200. FIG. It is a figure explaining the calculation method of a base. It is a timing chart which shows setting related processing basic operation (1/3). It is a timing chart which shows setting related processing basic operation (2/3). It is a timing chart which shows setting related processing basic operation (3/3). It is a figure which shows the process example at the time of power activation (1st process example). It is a figure which shows the process example at the time of power activation (2nd process example). It is a figure which shows the process example at the time of power activation (3rd process example). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a firing position management process. It is a figure explaining the game flow in a non-time shortening state. It is a figure explaining the game flow in the time shortening state. It is a continuous view showing an example of an effect image made to correspond to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure showing the flow of the reach production performed at the time of big hit (winning). It is a figure which shows the example of presentation of challenge bonus presentation. FIG. 18 is a continuous view partially showing an example of a treasure challenge effect. It is a continuous view showing an example of presentation of fireworks rush. FIG. 18 is a continuous view partially showing an example of an effect of a fireworks bonus effect. FIG. 18 is a continuous view partially showing an example of an effect of normal bonus effect. It is a continuous diagram showing an example of presentation of coast mode. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation memory production management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of production | presentation symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a production | design pattern fluctuation | variation pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit time change production pattern selection process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of procedure of out-of-time variation production pattern selection processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of a procedure of mode production management processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of composition of processing at the time of variable winning a prize device operation.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game arcade operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game in the pachinko machine 1, the game ball is a medium in which each one has a game value, and the benefits (profits) enjoyed by the player as a result of the game are, for example, the game ball earned by the player Can be converted into gaming value based on the number of Hereinafter, the entire configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

  Here, in the present specification, the left side is viewed from the player who is seated as opposed to the pachinko machine 1, the right side is viewed from the player, and the upper side is viewed from the player The lower side is viewed downward from the player, the front side viewed from the player, and the back side viewed from the player.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integral door unit 4 and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integral door unit 4 is located at the front of the player when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (rear side) of the integral door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which a wood and a metal material are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 is a fastener such as a screw for island equipment (not shown) in the game arcade. It is fixed by using. In the vertically-rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for portions corresponding to upper and lower short sides, and metal materials are used for portions corresponding to left and right long sides.

  The integral door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and they operate in an open / close manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends vertically along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A uniform lock unit 9 is provided inside the right side edge (the left side edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Moreover, the locking tool which is not shown in figure is provided also in the right side edge part (back side) of the integral door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2 corresponding to this, respectively. As shown in FIG. 1, in a state where the integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the united lock unit 9 on the back side thereof is combined with the lock and the integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. 7 is not open.

  Further, at the right side edge of the tray unit 6, a cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided. For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts the dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the uniform lock unit 9 operates to allow the integral door unit 4 to be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . When the whole of them is opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moving like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integral door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integral door unit 4 can be opened. When the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is exposed directly, and in this state, the manager of the game arcade can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board. Further, when the integral door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the above-mentioned gaming board unit 8 as a gaming unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the above-described inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integral door unit 4. The game board unit 8 is removable with respect to the inner frame assembly 7, for example, in a state where the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side. In the integral door unit 4, a vertically elongated circular window 4 a is formed at the central portion, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is attached in the window 4 a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integral door unit 4 via an attachment (not shown). A game area 8a (board, game board) is formed on the front of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integral door unit 4 is closed, a space where the gaming balls can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board.

  The saucer unit 6 generally has a shape protruding from the integral door unit 4 to the front side, and the upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. In the upper tray 6b, a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning can be stored. In the tray unit 6, a lower tray 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper tray 6b. In the lower plate 6c, gaming balls that are further paid out when the upper plate 6b is full are stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (type connected to a CR unit), and the gaming balls borrowed by the player are separated from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the winning balls. Disbursed to the plate 6b or the lower plate 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are disposed in the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 in a state where a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a storage IC, etc.) is inserted into a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees) The game balls of (for example, 125 pieces) are lent out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is disposed on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the CR unit. Incidentally, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium in which the frequency remains by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is described as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a type not connected to the CR unit) other than the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper disc ball release button 6d is installed in front of the upper disc 6b in the upper position, and a lower disc ball out lever 6e in the central part in front of the lower disc 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 6b to flow down to the lower tray 6c by, for example, pressing the upper tray sphere removing button 6d. In addition, the player can drop the gaming ball stored in the lower tray 6c downward and discharge it by sliding the lower bowl pulling lever 6e, for example, in the left direction. The game balls discharged are received by, for example, a ball receiving box not shown.

  A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6. The player operates the grip unit 16 to operate the firing control board set 174, and can shoot (strike) the game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The fired game balls rise from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge and are guided by the outer band (not shown) and thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails and a windmill (without reference numeral in the figure) are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nail and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board, game board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Composition of frame front]
In the integral door unit 4, a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 are installed as components for effect. Among them, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the glass frame decoration lamp 48 on the left side are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47, and the glass frame decoration lamp 50 on the right side is incorporated in the upper right illumination unit 49. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed on the integral door unit 4 so as to be continuous with the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 respectively, and these glass frame decoration lamps 52 It extends from the left and right edges of the integral door unit 4 to the front of the saucer unit 6. In the integral door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 50, 52, etc. are disposed so as to surround the glass unit.

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 described above execute effects by, for example, light emission (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.) of the built-in LED. In the upper part of the integral door unit 4, speakers 54 and 55 on the glass frame are respectively incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated at the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, 56 are to output effects sound, BGM, voice and the like (general sound) to execute effects.

  Further, at the center of the tray unit 6, a presentation switching button 45 (operation input accepting means) is installed at a position in front of the upper tray 6b. The effect switching button 45 can perform a plurality of types of operations (press once, press multiple times, continuous hit, long press, etc.), and accepts an operation input. The player switches the effect contents (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pressing (operation input) the effect switching button 45, or, for example, while the symbol is changing or the big hit is displayed. Alternatively, during the big hit game, it is possible to generate some effect (for example, a notice effect, a certain change promotion effect, a promotion effect during a big game, etc.).

  Furthermore, a jog dial 45a is installed around the effect switching button 45 so as to surround the effect switching button 45 (operation input accepting means, rotary selector). The player can change the effect contents displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, for example, by rotating the jog dial 45a.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the power control unit 162, the main control board unit 170, the dispensing unit 172, the flow path unit 173, the launch control board set 174, the dispensing control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. Besides, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown) and the like are provided.

The main control board unit 170 incorporates a main control device, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device.
The performance display monitor 200 is disposed in the main control device so as to be visible in the upper left area of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and includes four seven-segment LEDs 201 to 204 .

  The performance display monitor 200 (base display device) displays a base. Further, the performance display monitor 200 displays the setting value (setting value).

The four seven-segment LEDs 201 to 204 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each seven-segment LED has seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and dot segments located at the lower right of the seven segments. It is composed of
Performance display monitor 200 is visible through the transparent case covering main control board unit 170.

  Further, the main controller is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a setting key key hole 306. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used when performing RAM clear (initialization of the RAM 76), that is, initialization of the RAM (RWM) installed in the main control device. Further, the setting key key hole 306 is a key hole for inserting a setting key required to change the setting or refer to the setting.

  The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in the transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be disposed outside the transparent case. The setting key key hole 306 is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). For this reason, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is sealed.

  The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch for clearing the RAM. When the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed, the RAM clear signal is input to the main control unit 70 and the payout control unit 92, and the RAM clear process is performed. Is executed. The RAM clear switch 304 may be provided in the power control unit 162. In addition, when main control device 70 receives input of the RAM clear signal without inputting the RAM clear signal to payout control device 92, main control device 70 transmits a RAM clear command to payout control device 92. It is also good.

  The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key key hole 306 shown in FIG. 2 are merely examples, and can be arranged at arbitrary positions. In addition, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key key hole 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

  The above-described dispenser unit 172 has, for example, a winning ball tank 172a and a winning ball case (without a reference numeral). Among the above, the winning ball tank 172a is installed at the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In the state, it is possible to store gaming balls supplied from a supply route (not shown). The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through the upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the gaming balls sent from the payout device unit 172 toward the saucer unit 6 on the front side.

  Further, the external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). From the external terminal board 160, the game of the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Various external information signals (for example, winning ball information, door opening information, symbol determination frequency information, big hit information, starting opening information, etc.) indicating the progress status, maintenance status, etc. will be output to the external electronic device ing.

  The power supply cord 164 is to be connected to a power supply device (for example, AC 24 V) installed at an island facility of the game arcade, for example, to secure the power supply (power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal similarly installed in the island facility to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

  FIG. 3 is a front view showing the gaming board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin board, and in a state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, the above-mentioned game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (no reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

  In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is disposed at the center position of the game area 8a. The game area 8a is largely divided into a left portion, a right portion and a lower portion around the effect unit 40. The left portion of the game area 8a is a first game area (left-handed area) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time shortening state) or latent probability change state (high probability non-time shortening state). The right part of is the second game area (right-handed area, specific area) used in the advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state, low probability time shortening state, high probability time shortening state etc) . In the game area 8a, the middle start winning opening 26, the start gate 20, the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device around the effect unit 40. 31 mag is distributed and installed.

Among these, the middle start winning opening 26 is disposed at the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a.
The second variable winning device 31, the start gate 20, the first variable winning device 30, and the variable start winning device 28 are arranged in this order from the top in the right portion of the game area 8a.

  The three normal winning openings 22 on the left side are disposed in the left portion of the game area 8a, and one normal winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right is between the starting gate 20 and the first variable winning device 30. It is arranged.

  The game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters the middle start winning opening 26 and the normal winning openings 22 and 24 in the process of flowing down, and enters the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the opening operation. , Passes through the start gate 20, enters the first variable winning device 30 in the opening operation, or enters the variable starting winning device 28 in the opening operation.

  Here, there is a possibility that the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a mainly enters the middle start winning opening 26 or enters the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right area of the game area 8a mainly enters the second variable winning device 31 during opening operation, passes through the start gate 20, or enters the normal winning opening 24. Or, there is a possibility that the first variable winning device 30 at the opening operation is entered or the variable start winning device 28 at the opening operation is entered.

  The game ball having passed through the start gate 20 continues to flow down the game area 8a, but the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning The game balls having entered the device 31 are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the through holes formed in the game board (plywood material forming the game board unit 8, transparent board etc.).

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the game ball is entered into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22 due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board), the area of the left portion in the game area 8a (left It is necessary to hit the game ball in the area (to execute so-called "left-hand strike").

  On the other hand, when entering the game ball into the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning opening 24, the area of the right portion in the game area 8a It is necessary to hit the game ball in) (to execute so-called "right-handed").

  The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a hitting manner), and accordingly, the right starting winning opening 28a (start winning opening) is entered. Allows the ball (usually motorized role). The variable start winning device 28 has one opening and closing member 28b, and the opening and closing member 28b reciprocates in the left and right direction along the board by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The open / close member 28b is in the closed position with its tip facing upward, and at this time, entry into the right start winning opening 28a is disabled (no clearance for the game ball to enter). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 operates, the open / close member 28b is displaced from the closed position toward the open position (falls right) and opens the right start winning opening 28a. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 becomes capable of entering the game ball, and can enter the right start winning opening 28a (variable start winning means). At this time, the opening and closing member 28b also functions as a member for guiding the game ball into the start winning hole 28a.

  The first variable winning device 30 is the second when the specified condition is satisfied (for example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, the second variable winning device 30) When special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "5 round normal symbol" or "5 round probability symbol"), it enables the winning of the first large winning opening 30b (upper large winning opening) (special Motorized role, first special prize event occurrence means).

  The first variable winning device 30 has one opening and closing member 30a, and the opening and closing member 30a reciprocates in the left and right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The open / close member 30a is in the closed position with its tip facing upward, and at this time, entry into the first large winning opening 30b is disabled (no clearance for the game ball to enter). On the other hand, when the first variable winning device 30 is actuated, the open / close member 30a is displaced from the closed position toward the open position (falling leftward) to open the first big winning opening 30b. During this time, the first variable winning device 30 becomes capable of entering the game ball, and can enter the first large winning opening 30b. At this time, the opening and closing member 30a also functions as a member for guiding the game ball into the first big winning opening 30b.

  The second variable winning device 31 is when special conditions are satisfied (for example, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit) (the second special symbol is “five round regular symbols” or “five round odd variation” Operates to stop the display in the form of “pattern”)) and enables winning on the second large winning opening 31b (lower large winning opening) (special electric winning combination, second special winning event occurrence) means).

  The second variable winning device 31 has one opening and closing member 31a, and the opening and closing member 31a reciprocates in the left and right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening and closing member 31a is in the closing position with its tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the second large winning opening 31b (a state in which there is no gap where the game ball can enter). On the other hand, when the second variable winning device 31 operates, the open / close member 31a is displaced from the closed position toward the open position (falling leftward) to open the second big winning opening 31b. During this time, the second variable winning device 31 can enter the game ball, and can generate the second large winning opening 31b. At this time, the opening / closing member 31a also functions as a member for guiding the ball into the second big winning opening 31b.

  The arrangement of obstacle nails and the shape of the structure of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 are basically the variable start winning device 28 (the right start winning opening 28a at the time of opening) and the first variable winning device 30 (at the time of opening 1 large winning opening 30b), has become a mode that does not extremely inhibit the flow of the game ball toward the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b at the time of opening), but variable starting while the game ball is open It does not mean that the player always enters the winning device 28 (right start winning opening 28a), the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening 30b), and the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b), Entering the ball occurs randomly at all.

  The above-mentioned effect unit 40 is installed on the game board unit 8 from the central position to the right side part. In addition to the upper edge 40a of the effect unit 40 functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball, the effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative components 40b and 40c inside. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by their three-dimensional shaping, and can perform an effect operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like) . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols. . As described above, the gaming board unit 8 impresses the player with the features of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board and the decorativeness of the rendering unit 40. In addition, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board), the decorative property is added not only on the front side but also with various decoration bodies (including a movable body and a light emitter) disposed behind the game board 8b. can do.

  In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid or the like) is attached to the inside of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f for effect (for example, a character of an animal). In addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter, the movable object 40 f for effect can execute the effect accompanied by the operation of the tangible object. The effect using the movable body 40 f can exert an appeal different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

  Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when the game balls flowing down the game area 8a randomly flow into the ball guide passage 40d, they pass through the inside and roll. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, and here, the gaming ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game balls rolled on the rolling stage 40 e eventually flow down into the lower game area 8 a. A ball release passage 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the gaming balls guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release passage 40k easily flow into the middle start winning opening 26 located immediately below it. .

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and game balls which did not enter (winning) various prize ports are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32. In addition, including the game balls entered into the normal winning opening 22, 24 and the medium starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, it is driven into the game area 8a All the played balls are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through the out passage assembly (not shown) to the outside of the frame, and join the supply path of the island equipment (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (the right side position in the window 4a). That is, in addition to the normal symbol display device 33 and the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a being provided on the right side position in the window 4a, for example, the game board unit 8 also has a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And the game state display device 38 is provided. Among them, the normal symbol display device 33 turns on, for example, two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display an ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and stops the normal symbol by turning on or off the lamp. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 stored numbers, for example, by a combination of lighting or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which two lamps are turned off together, 0 is displayed, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, 1 is displayed, and in the display mode in which one same lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two memories are displayed and one lamp is lighted and the other lamp is lighted, three memories are displayed, and in the display mode in which two lamps are blinked together, the memory number is four. It is in the condition of displaying pieces. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, four lamps (LEDs) may be used to form a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of stored memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  Each time the game ball passes through the above-mentioned start gate 20, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to a display mode after incrementing one by one in order to store the occurrence of the passage serving as the trigger of the operation lottery each time After passing (up to a maximum of 4), the symbol changes to a display mode after being reduced one by one every time fluctuation of the symbol is started. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lighted (the number of memories is zero), the game ball passes through the starting gate 20 in the normal symbol changeable start state (during stop display) However, the display mode does not change. That is, the memory number (up to four) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passes where fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

  Also, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 display the variation state and the stop state of the corresponding first special symbol or the second special symbol by, for example, 7-segment LED (with dots), respectively. (Symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  In addition, each of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is, for example, 0 to 4 according to a display mode configured by combination of lighting or blinking of two lamps (LEDs) respectively. The number of stored data is displayed (stored number display means). For example, in the display mode in which two lamps are turned off together, 0 is displayed, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, 1 is displayed, and in the display mode in which one same lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two memories are displayed and one lamp is lighted and the other lamp is lighted, three memories are displayed, and in the display mode in which two lamps are blinked together, the memory number is four. It is in the condition of displaying pieces.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is a display after increase by one in the sense that the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26 every time the game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26. It changes to the form (up to 4 at maximum), and changes to the display mode after decreasing one by one every time the change of the special symbol is triggered by the entering of the ball. In addition, every time the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is increased by one in the sense that the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28a. It changes to the display mode of (up to 4 at maximum), and changes to the display mode after decreasing one by one every time the variation of the special symbol is triggered by the entering of the ball. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lighted (the number of memories is zero), the first special symbol is already in a state where fluctuation can be started (during stop display). The display mode does not change even if the game ball enters the game room. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in the state that the second special symbol can start changing already (during stop display) Even if it is a sphere, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of entering balls for which the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started at that time It represents the number of times.

  Further, the gaming state display device 38 includes, for example, LEDs respectively corresponding to the big hit classification display lamps 38a, 38b and 38c, the probability fluctuation status display lamp 38d, the short time status display lamp 38e and the launch position designation lamp 38f. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display substrate 89.

[Configuration on control]
Next, the configuration regarding control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a main control unit 70 (main control computer) which is central to the control operation, and this main control unit 70 mainly has a function to control the progress (content) of the game in the pachinko machine 1 Have. Main controller 70 is incorporated in main control board unit 170.

  The main control unit 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 which is a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 controls the ROM 74, RAM (CPU core and registers not shown). The semiconductor memory such as RWM 76 is integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is also equipped with a random number circuit (random number generator) 75, an interrupt controller (interrupt CTR) 192, a parallel I / O port 79, a timer circuit (PTC) 194, and a serial communication circuit (SCU) 196. ing. Among them, the random number circuit 75 generates hardware random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for a big hit determination of a special symbol lottery and a hit determination of a normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is The data is input to the main control CPU 72. The interrupt controller 192 receives each interrupt request (XINT interrupt, PTC interrupt, SCU interrupt) from the parallel I / O port 79, timer circuit 194, and serial communication circuit 196, and controls these interrupt requests based on priority. . In addition, the main controller 70 monitors the RAM clear switch 71 for initializing the RAM 76 and changing settings, etc., the parallel I / O port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and various states. Peripheral ICs such as a reset controller that generates a reset as needed are provided, and these are mounted on the circuit board together with the main control CPU 72. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or in the inner layer portion). The I / O port of the main control device 70 may be in a serial form.

  Further, in the main control device 70, a setting change device 300, a setting key switch 302, and a RAM clear switch 304 are provided. Main controller 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the settings by operating setting change device 300. The setting change device 300 is a device that switches a setting (at least a setting relating to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery), and operates by operating the RAM clear switch 304 or the like provided in the pachinko machine 1. Also, setting means a combination of actuation probabilities. Furthermore, the operation probability refers to the probability that a combination of special symbols that will cause the condition device to be activated (a big hit game will be executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device for inputting a signal (ON / OFF) indicating the rotation state along with the rotation of the setting key which is essential for switching the setting. Although the procedure of the change of a setting can employ | adopt various methods, it can carry out in the following procedures, for example.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 6 a and rotated in the right direction to open the integral door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) Since the setting key key hole for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304 are provided inside the pachinko machine 1, the setting key is inserted in the setting key key hole, and the setting key is set. Rotate to the right.
(4) Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on the input signal. At this time, the safety lock is locked by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key can not be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

  Here, if the power is turned on while turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is turned to the right, the setting is changed (setting change state). On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is turned to the right, the setting can be referred to (setting reference state).

(6) In the state where the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of six steps, for example, by pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times.
The set value can be displayed on, for example, the performance display monitor 200, a dedicated 7-segment LED, or a gaming state display device 38 (such as a special symbol display device).

(7) In the case of the slot machine, when the target setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since there is no lever in the pachinko machine 1, an alternative process instead of the lever ON process (for example, left the setting key A process of rotating in a direction, a process of turning on a setting change confirmation button (not shown), and the like may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In the present embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is turned counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the change in setting is confirmed based on the input signal.

(8) Then, when the setting change is confirmed, the setting key can be removed from the setting key keyhole. By this operation, when setting values are displayed on the performance display monitor 200, the dedicated 7-segment LED, and the gaming state display device 38, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of the pachinko machine 1. This completes the change of settings. When the setting change is completed, the normal game is started.

  When the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 stores the changed set value in the set value buffer of the RAM 76. The set value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Summary of setting change]
The outline of the setting change is as follows.
When the power is turned on with "setting key ON", "inner frame opened state", and "RAM clear switch pressed state", the setting is changed (setting change mode) after clearing the RAM.
When the setting is being changed, there is no display of the main indicator (various lamps included in the gaming state display device 38), and the firing of the gaming balls, the winning balls of the gaming balls, and the like can not be performed at all.

  In this case, "rn." Is displayed on the two left 7-segment LEDs (identification segments) of the performance display monitor 200, and the set value is displayed as "-1" on the two right 7-segment LEDs (ratio segments). Ru. When the RAM clear switch is pressed, the set value changes in the range of 1 to 6.

Then, when "setting key OFF" is set, the setting is decided, and the display of the ratio segment is such that the segment of "-" is turned off (non-displayed) like "blank (non-display) 1".
In this state, when the inner frame is closed (in fact, when the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in the setting change is ended, and once it is switched to the state before the power is turned off, the normal gaming state is entered. Transition.

  In the present embodiment, although the example in which the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are shared is described, a setting change switch may be separately provided separately from the RAM clear switch 304.

[Overview of setting reference]
The outline of setting reference is as follows.
When the power is turned on with "setting key ON", "inner frame opened state", and "state not pressed by RAM clear switch", the setting reference state (setting reference mode) is established.
As in the setting change state, in the setting reference state, there is no display on the main indicator, and the game ball can not be fired or the game ball can not be won at all.

  In this case, “rn.” Is displayed on the two left 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left of the performance display monitor, and the set value is “blank (not displayed) 1” on the right two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) Is displayed. Further, in the state of referring to setting, the setting value does not change even if the RAM clear switch is pressed.

In this state, when the "setting key is off" and the "inner frame is closed" (in fact, the closing state continues for 100 ms), the setting reference state is ended, and the power before the power is turned off. After transitioning to the state, transition to the normal gaming state is made.
In the present embodiment, although the setting reference can not be performed during the normal game, the setting reference may be executable during the normal game.

  A gate switch 78 for detecting passage of the game ball is integrally provided in the above-mentioned start gate 20. In addition, the game board unit 8 corresponds to the medium start winning opening 26, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively, and the middle start winning opening switch 80 and the right start winning opening. A switch 82, a first count switch 84 and a second count switch 85 are provided. The respective start winning opening switches 80, 82 are for detecting entry of gaming balls into the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28a). In addition, the first count switch 84 is for detecting entry of the gaming ball into the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning opening) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting entry of the gaming ball into the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) and counting the number thereof.

  Similarly, in the game board unit 8, a first winning opening switch 86 for detecting entry of gaming balls into the normal winning opening 22 and a second winning opening switch for detecting entry of gaming balls into the normal winning opening 24. The 81 and is equipped. Although the configuration using the common winning opening switch 86 is taken as an example for the three normal winning openings 22 on the left side, for example, three winning opening switches are installed, and the game ball for each normal winning opening 22 is The ball may be detected separately.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). In the present embodiment, the winning detection signal from the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning opening switch 86, and the second winning opening switch 81 is A signal is transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, a connection terminal, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

  In addition, the game board unit 8 is provided with an out switch 99. The game board unit 8 joins the game balls that have passed through the normal winning openings 22, 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first large winning opening 30b, the second large winning opening 31b, and the out opening 32. A merging passage is formed, and an out switch 99 is provided in the merging passage. The out switch 99 detects a game ball passing through the merging passage, and a detection signal is input to the main control device 70 each time the game ball is detected. Main controller 70 counts the number of out spheres based on the detection signal input from out switch 99. Here, since the game balls fired to the game area 8a are always discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the merging passage, the out switch 99 is the number of fired balls fired to the game area 8a, That is, the number of balls discharged from the game area 8a (the number of balls out) is counted.

  The normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game described above The display operation of the status display device 38 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals to the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a in accordance with the progress of the game to control the lighting state of each LED. Further, the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display substrate 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display board 89 via the panel relay terminal board 87.

Further, a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device 70 via a panel relay terminal board 87. The performance display monitor 200 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the calculation status of the base, and controls the lighting state of the seven segments 201 to 204.
Although the performance display monitor 200 is described as being connected to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal board 87, the performance display monitor 200 may be connected to the main control apparatus 70 not via the panel relay terminal board 87. The performance display monitor 200 may be disposed as an internal configuration of the main control device 70.

  In addition, the game board unit 8 corresponds to the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively, the normal electric combination solenoid 88, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 and the first 2 large winning opening solenoid 97 is provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97 operate (excitation) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open and close the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. Or the vane member 31d for the positive change region is moved. The control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 by relaying the panel relay terminal board 87 to these solenoids 88, 90, 97 as well.

  In addition, a glass frame open switch 91 is installed in the integral door unit 4, and a plastic frame open switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When integral door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from glass frame open switch 91 is input to main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and inner frame assembly 7 is released from outer frame unit 2 The contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integral door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integral door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, it generates a door open information signal as an external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (a payout control computer) controls the operation of the above-described payout device unit 172. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control substrate) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 also has semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM (RAM) 98 together with a CPU core not shown. It is configured as an integrated LSI. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the winning ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of gaming balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as an external information signal together with a prize ball instruction command.

  The payout control device 92 can communicate with the main control device 70, and pays out the game ball based on the payout command transmitted from the main control device 70.

  In the winning ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, the payout device substrate 100 is disposed together with the payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor), and a drive circuit of the payout motor 102 is provided on the payout device substrate 100. There is. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of gaming balls from the winning ball case. Let out. The game balls paid out are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, the payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at the upstream position of the winning ball case, and the payout counting switch 106 is installed at the downstream position of the payout motor 102. Whenever the winning balls are actually paid out by the driving of the payout motor 102, the counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is inputted to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when the ball breakage occurs at the upstream position of the winning ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball breakage switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The payout device substrate 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball condition based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, the full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6 c (the position of the bowl when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is full with game balls, the game balls paid out more are described above Flow into the lower plate 6c. Furthermore, when the lower plate 6c becomes full with gaming balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends the further prize ball operation even when the prize ball instruction command is received from the main control CPU 72, and stores the number of unpaid prize balls remaining in the RAM 98. The memory of RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the unpaid prize ball remaining number information will not be lost .

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a launch control board 108 and a launch solenoid 110 are installed. Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the above-described launch control board set 174. Among them, the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among them, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of delivering the gaming balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the firing solenoid 110 strikes the game ball sent to the shooting position, and performs an operation of continuously (intermittently) shooting one game ball toward the game area 8a as described above. Note that the firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal that is proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is in contact with the grip unit 16 (the launch handle, the ball launcher) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. Then, the firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

  A discharge relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and signals from the discharge lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the release stop switch 116 are transmitted to the discharge control board 108 via the discharge relay terminal plate 118. Be done. Also, the drive signal from the emission control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the emission relay terminal plate 118. When the player manipulates the firing handle, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) according to the amount of manipulation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength to launch the game ball is adjusted in accordance with the amount of operation of the player. When the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or the emission stop signal is input from the emission stop switch 116, the drive circuit of the emission control board 108 stops the drive of the emission solenoid 110. Do. In addition, when the game device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118 and the CR unit is not connected to the device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the same release control board The drive circuit 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  Further, the tray unit 6 incorporates a frequency display board 122 and a lending and return switch board 123. Among these, the frequency display substrate 122 is provided with a display (a three-digit seven-segment LED) for the frequency display unit. In addition, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending and return switch substrate 123, and when the sphere lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is borrowed. And, it is transmitted from the return switch substrate 123 to the CR unit via the game apparatus connection terminal board 120 such as a game ball. Further, from the CR unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display substrate 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal, and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. In addition, when the value medium is not inserted into the CR unit, or when the remaining frequency of the input value medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display substrate 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (value medium You can also display a message prompting you to

  Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the presentation control apparatus 124 (computer for presentation control) as a structure on control. The effect control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 controls effects according to the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Also in the effect control device 124, a effect control CPU 126, which is a central processing unit, is mounted on a circuit board (composite sub control substrate). The effect control CPU 126 is configured as an LSI incorporating a semiconductor memory such as the RAM (RWM) 130 and the eDRAM 131 together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is equipped with various functions required to realize effects in the pachinko machine 1. For example, to control devices such as VDP 152 for drawing an effect screen to be reproduced on the screen of liquid crystal display 42, lamps 46 to 52 for producing visual effects, panel lamp 53, movable body motor 57, status LED 58, etc. And an audio IC 134 for controlling the speakers 54, 55, and 56 for outputting audio. The internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124 will be described later in detail using another figure.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are mutually connected via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. In the communication harness, the bus width of various effect commands (hereinafter referred to as “sub command” or “effect command”) transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124 is used. The parallel form may be adopted, or the serial form may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of each driver (I / O).

  In the present embodiment, the sub connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integral door unit 4, and the drive signals from the driver IC 132 and the audio IC 134 are transmitted through the sub connection board 136 to the various lamps 46 to 52 and the speakers 54, 55, 56 is applied. Also, the sub connection board 136 is connected to the effect switching button 45 and a volume adjustment switch (not shown), and when the player operates the effect switching button 45 or the volume adjustment switch, those contact signals are transmitted through the sub connection board 136. It is input to the effect control device 124. Further, a jog dial 45a is connected to the sub connection board 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is inputted to the effect control device 124 through the sub connection board 136. Here, although an example in which the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are connected to the sub connection substrate 136 is given, when the receiving plate electronic decoration substrate is installed, the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are connected to the receiving plate electronic decoration substrate It may be

  In addition, a driver board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 and a status LED 58 are connected to the driver board 138 in addition to the board lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via, for example, a link mechanism (not shown). The drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53, the movable body motor 57 and the status LED 58 via the driver substrate 138.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen can be viewed through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 incorporates a switching power supply circuit and can generate necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V or the like) from the outside power (for example, AC24V or the like) taken from the island facility through the power cord 164. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control unit 70, the payout control unit 92, the effect control unit 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the firing control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is also supplied to the CR unit via the game apparatus connection terminal board 120 such as a game ball. The low voltage power (for example, DC + 5 V) for logic is generated by a power supply IC (three-terminal regulator or the like) incorporated in each device. Further, as described above, the power control unit 162 is grounded to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are externally output from the external terminal plate 160 via the payout control device 92. Output. The main controller 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. Signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected, for example, by a hall computer (not shown) of the game arcade. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but the configuration may be such that the external information signal is output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 as it is.

[Internal configuration of effect control device]
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124. As shown in FIG.
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a role as an effect control processor that controls the effect as the game progresses. Therefore, in addition to the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188 which are necessary for the effect control device 124 to function as an effect control processor. The control ROM 180 stores a basic program related to control of presentation. The effect control CPU 126 accesses the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and controls the effect by executing a program stored in the control ROM 180. The watchdog timer IC 188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is properly performed (whether the processing is completed within the estimated time) and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU 126 There is. When a signal (clear pulse) for clearing the watchdog timer of the watchdog timer IC 188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC 188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for causing the effect control CPU 126 to start reset. Do. Thereby, the effect control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

  In addition to these, the effect control device 124 also has an SRAM 182 which is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 which generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real time clock (RTC) 184 which performs time management as functions related to effect. A lithium battery 186 for supplying backup power to the SRAM 182 and the RTC 184, and peripheral ICs such as an input / output driver (not shown) and a counter / timer circuit are provided. While the lithium battery 186 is supplied with driving power from the power control unit 162 to the effect control device 124, the lithium battery 186 stores this power and charges itself. The SRAM 182 and the RTC 184 are connected to the lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the supply of drive power from the power control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is interrupted. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the SRAM 182 and the RTC 184 continue to operate until the charge of the lithium battery 186 is cut (for example, about one and a half months). The stored information can be held for a while even under power-off conditions.

  The effect control program is configured to save, in the SRAM 182, information on security, monitoring, defects and the like that should not be easily erased. Thereby, for example, when some trouble occurs in the effect control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is collected (or checked in the installation state), and the factor investigation of the trouble is advanced by analyzing the information held in the SRAM 182. It becomes possible.

The effect control device 124 is a device that controls the contents of effects relating to a game.
The RTC 184 is a device that can communicate with the effect control device 124 by serial communication or the like, and holds current time information (predetermined information). The RTC 184 is a device that counts the current time and updates the current time information regardless of whether the gaming machine is in a power-off state.

  By the way, in the control of the effect executed by the effect control CPU 126 in accordance with the program stored in the control ROM 180, the liquid crystal display 42, the various lamps 46 to 53, the speakers 54, 55, 56, the status LED 58, etc. Control of the production using the device is included. The flow of the effect control can be roughly divided into two steps of “overall control (reproduction instruction)” and “individual control (reproduction control)”. The effect control CPU 126 first receives an effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce an effect according to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the effect control CPU 126 generates instruction data in which the instruction content is converted into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 relays between the effect control CPU 126 and each device. Send to (individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and effect reproduction using each device in the pachinko machine 1 (screen display, voice output, lamp emission, movable body displacement Etc.) is realized.

  Thus, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions according to the stage of effect control, and these functions are realized by selectively using the resources of the effect control CPU 126. At the stage of the overall control, the effect control unit 210 in the effect control CPU 126 becomes an operation subject. In the individual control stage, the display control unit 220, the audio control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the motor control unit 226 or the sensor control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 are operated according to the device to be controlled. It becomes. The effect control unit 210 may directly control the control devices 134, 152, 198, and 199.

  The effect control device 124 functions as an effect control processor at the stage of overall control, but functions as an effect reproduction processor at the stage of individual control. Therefore, in addition to the circuit board (effect display control board) on which the VDP 152 is mounted and the CGROM (image / sound ROM) 190, the effect control device 124 further includes an audio IC 134 for controlling various devices used for reproduction of effects. An LED driver 198, an SMC (serial controller) 199, and a driver IC 132 are provided.

  The CGROM 190 stores a drawing material (moving image data) constituting an effect screen and a sound material (audio data) output with the progress of the effect in a compressed state by a predetermined compression algorithm. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the audio IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

  The VDP 152 is a processor dedicated to rendering of an effect image, and is integrated with the effect control CPU 126 into one chip. Also, the VDP 152 incorporates a VRAM 156 mainly used for developing a drawing material, and a drawing material decoder 157 for decompressing (decoding) the drawing material in a compressed state. The VDP 152 first analyzes the content of the instruction sent from the display control unit 220, reads the necessary drawing material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. The rendering material decoder 157 decodes the read rendering material, renders a rendering image on the VRAM 156, and develops the rendering image in a frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). Reproduction of the effect screen is realized by individually driving each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data.

  The audio IC 134 is a sound generator that generates audio such as sound effects and BGM to be reproduced during execution of effects, and is connected to an amplifier, an external DRAM, and a CG bus (not shown). Also, the audio IC 134 incorporates an audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) the compressed audio material. The voice IC 134 first analyzes the instruction content transmitted from the voice control unit 222, and reads out necessary voice material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus. Then, the read audio material is decoded using the audio material decoder 135 on the external DRAM. By outputting the decoded audio to the glass frame speakers 54 and 55 and the outer frame speaker 56 via an amplifier, audio reproduction (or a larger number of channels) of stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch is realized. Further, the audio IC 134 adjusts the output sound volume of each of the speakers 54, 55, and 56 based on the contact signal input when the sound volume adjustment switch is operated.

  The LED driver 198 controls the lighting patterns and the luminance patterns of the various lamps 46 to 53 and the status LED 58 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In the LED driver 198, an addressing synchronous serial system is adopted. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the luminance pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the lamp control unit 224, and transfers driving data corresponding to the control to the driver IC 132.

  The SMC 199 controls a drive pattern of the movable body motor 57 serving as a drive source of the movable body 40 f for effect provided in the inside of the effect unit 40. In the SMC 199, a clock synchronous serial system is adopted. The SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the motor control unit 226, and transfers this to the driver IC 132. Although SMC 199 is used here only for motor drive pattern generation, since SMC 199 can generate not only the motor but also the lighting pattern and luminance pattern of the lamp, the SMC 199 is applied instead of the LED driver 198 described above. Alternatively, the SMC 199 may be configured to generate both lamp and motor data patterns.

  The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamp or the motor based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 or the SMC 199. The driver IC 132 includes, for example, switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) IC and MOSFET (not shown), and switches (or switches duty) drive voltages applied to the various lamps 46 to 53, the movable body motor 57, and the status LED 58. Then, by managing the operation, effect reproduction using a lamp or a movable body is realized. Of the various lamps 46 to 53, the panel lamp 53 is an LED incorporated in the effect unit 40 or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, etc. It is equivalent. The status LED 58 is constituted by one or more LEDs, and is a lamp that indicates the status of the effect control device (for example, the status before system initialization, the status after system initialization, the normal status, etc.) by a lighting pattern. Moreover, although the example in which the glass frame decoration lamp 52 is connected to the sub connection board 136 is mentioned here, the receiver electric decoration board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the glass board decoration lamp 52 It may be configured to be connected to the driver IC 132 via the same.

  In addition to this, the driver IC 132 transfers the contact signal input when the effect switching button 45 or the jog dial 45a is operated, to the effect control unit 210 via the sensor control unit 228. The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the effect content to be reproduced based on the content of the contact signal to be transferred.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a memory map of a memory area used by the main control CPU 72. As shown in FIG.
The memory area used by the main control CPU 72 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 74 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 76.

  The area (first area) of the addresses 0000H to 0BFFH is an area capable of storing the program code (program) of the used area. The program code of the use area is first information (for controlling the progress of the game) necessary for the execution of the game.

  The area (first area) of the addresses 0000H to 0BFFH is a part of information of the program code (first information) of the used area and the program code (second information) which is not required to execute the game. A special program code (special information) is stored.

  The area of addresses 0C00H to 0FFFH is an unused area.

The area (first area) of addresses 1000H to 1BFFH is an area capable of storing program data (data) of the used area. The program data of the use area is the first information necessary for the execution of the game.
The area (first area) of the addresses 1000H to 1BFFH is part of the program data (first information) of the used area and part of the program data (second information) which is not necessary for execution of the game. Special program data (special information) is stored.

  The area of addresses 1C00H to 1FFFH is an unused area.

The area (second area) of the addresses 2000H to 2FFFH is an area where program code and program data outside the area can be stored. The program code / program data outside the area is second information that is not necessary for the execution of the game (for example, processing related to processing for performing a test defined by the gaming machine rules and processing related to a performance display monitor).
In the area (second area) of the addresses 2000H to 2FFFH, non-special program code / non-special program data (non-program code / non-special program data) which is the remaining information of the program code / program data (second information) which is not necessary for executing the game Special information is stored.

  The area of addresses 3000H to EFFFH is an unused area.

The area of the addresses F000H to F1FFH is used as a work area of the used area and a stack RAM.
The area of addresses F200H to F3FFH is used as a work area outside the area and a stack RAM.
These areas are used as stack areas for temporarily saving areas and data temporarily used when a program of the used area is being executed or a program outside the area is being executed.

  The area of addresses F400H to FFFFH is an unused area.

  In the memory area of the ROM 74, in addition to the area used and areas other than the area, an area where arbitrary data such as the program title and version are stored, and a program in which information necessary for the main control CPU 72 to execute the program is stored. A management area may be provided.

  As described above, the ROM 74 and the RAM 76 (storage means) of the present embodiment are used areas (first areas) capable of storing program code and program data (first information) necessary for the execution of a game, and It has an area (second area) which can store program code and program data (second information) not required for execution.

  Here, the use area is an area in which the capacity available for controlling the progress of the game is defined by the gaming machine rules, and the outside of the area is an area not included in the calculation of the usable capacity. .

  The main control unit 70 (main control CPU 72) is a pachinko machine based on program code / program data (first information) required for game execution and program code / program data (second information) not required for game execution. Control the machine 1 (game machine) (control means).

  In the use area (first area), of the program code / program data (first information) required to execute the game and the program code / program data (second information) not required for execution of the game Special program code / special program data (special information) which is a part of information is stored.

  Outside the area (second area), non-special program code / non-special program data (non-special information) which is the remaining information of the program code / program data (second information) which is not required to execute the game It is stored.

  The special program code and special program data (special information) are different information for each model in a plurality of types of different types of game contents, and the non-special program code and non-special program data (non-special information) are the contents of the game Is information common to each model in different types of models.

  Therefore, when changing the specification of the gaming machine, it is necessary to change the special program code and the special program data. On the other hand, the non-special program code and non-special program data do not need to be changed even if the specification of the gaming machine is changed.

  In the special program code and special program data (special information), a process of determining whether to calculate the base based on the gaming state in the process of calculating the base, and the value of the number of winning balls are confirmed Information on at least one of the confirmation processes is included. Either the determination process or the confirmation process may be non-special program code or non-special program data (non-special information).

In the present embodiment, due to the performance of the main control CPU 72, even when the same instruction (program code) is used, the processing speed may differ between when used in the used area and when used outside the area. is there. For example, when using an LDQ instruction (special load instruction) in the used area, the processing speed is increased, but when the LDQ instruction is used outside the area, the processing speed is not increased. Therefore, outside the area, it is necessary to use an LD instruction (normal load instruction) whose processing speed is slow. The reason for this is that when the LDQ instruction is used outside the area, it is necessary to add the stack pointer and the Q register save, reset, and return processing, and the processing speed is rather slow.
For this reason, in the present embodiment, the processing speed is faster in the case of executing the processing relating to the used area than in the case of executing the processing relating to the outside of the area.

  The main control CPU 72 processes (first process) the use area necessary for the execution of the game by using (by executing) the program code / program data stored in the use area (first area). It can be executed (first process execution means).

In addition, the main control CPU 72, by using (by executing) program code · program data stored outside the area (second area), processing outside the area not necessary for the execution of the game (second process ) Can be performed (second processing execution means).
The above is the configuration example regarding control of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the relationship between the setting value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.
When the setting value is “1”, the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is “1/319”.
When the set value is "2", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/299".
When the set value is "3", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/279".
When the set value is "4", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/259".
When the set value is "5", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/239".
When the set value is “6”, the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is “1/199”.

  When the set value is “1” to “6”, the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is “1/32”.

  As described above, the larger the set value is, the larger the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is, which is an advantageous situation for the player.

  In the illustrated example, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery has been described as an example in which the setting difference is provided only in the low probability state, but the setting difference may be provided even in the high probability state. Further, regarding the setting, not only the big hit probability but also the small hit probability may have a setting difference. Furthermore, setting differences may be provided in other items (for example, the transition rate to the high probability state, the transition rate to the time reduction state, the number of definite variations, the number of time reductions, the number of special variations, etc.).

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the state of the setting key, the possibility of changing the setting, and the possibility of inserting and removing.
If the state of the setting key is ON (when the input signal from the setting key switch 302 is ON when rotating in the right direction), setting change (including setting reference) is possible, and the setting key It is impossible to pull it out. That is, the setting key can not be removed while changing the setting or referring to the setting.

  On the other hand, when the state of the setting key is OFF (when the input signal from the setting key switch 302 is OFF when rotating in the left direction), setting change (including setting reference) is impossible and setting It is possible to remove the key. That is, the setting key can be removed unless the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to.

For setting change and setting reference, if it is possible to shift to the setting change state or the setting reference state only by operating the button without using the “setting key”, for example, a person who does not have the right to change the setting Player etc.) can change the setting or refer to the setting, and there is a risk such as setting leakage.
Therefore, with regard to setting change and setting reference, the use of the “setting key (key)” is an essential condition.

  The state of the "setting key" is two states of ON or OFF. The state of the “setting key” can be confirmed by a signal from the setting key switch 302. Maintain the ON state and the OFF state by the operation of “setting key”

Insertion and removal of the "setting key" is possible only when the state of the "setting key" is OFF. The “setting key” can be inserted into the setting key keyhole 306.
The setting key key hole 306 is present in the transparent case covering the main control board unit 170, and can be operated without opening the transparent case.

For example, the following conditional branch is included in the program code of main controller 70:
The transition condition to setting change or setting reference includes that the setting key is ON.
The transition condition to the setting determined state during setting change includes that the setting key is turned from ON to OFF. Alternatively, it simply includes "the setting key is in the OFF state".
The termination condition during setting change or setting reference includes that the setting key is OFF.

  As a result, without "setting key", it is not possible to shift during setting change or setting reference, and since setting values can not be determined, setting changes or setting leaks unintended by the hall manager. It can prevent.

  Subsequently, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[CPU initialization (main) processing in main controller]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 starts CPU initialization processing. The CPU initialization process restores the gaming state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information stored at the time of the previous power shutoff or clears the backup information to the contrary, the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 is It is a process to prepare. Further, the CPU initialization process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for securing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjustment of the initial state.

  10 and 11 are flowcharts showing a first procedure example of the CPU initialization process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S100: The main control CPU 72 first sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector table. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the interrupt vector table in the I register (interrupt vector register) used for interrupt control. In the interrupt vector table, the priorities required to control interrupt requests generated during execution of the CPU initialization process are defined, and the main control CPU 72 executes a plurality of processes based on the priorities defined in the interrupt vector table. Execute interrupt requests in order.

  Step S104: The main control CPU 72 saves the RAM clear signal (the input signal from the RAM clear switch 304). More specifically, the value of the input port to which the RAM clear signal is input is obtained twice in succession, and the logical sum of these values is saved as the input port value.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 executes standby processing here. This process is a process of waiting for the power supply to be stabilized and a process of waiting for activation of the effect control device 124. The main control CPU 72 secures a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms, about 3.1 seconds) after the power is turned on, and during that time, it is a signal indicating that the power off notice signal (power shutoff is occurring) Check the). Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it checks the bit of the input port of the power-off notice signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The power-off notice signal is input by an IC that monitors the voltage level of the drive voltage. Then, if the input of the power-off notice signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 resumes the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, it is possible to achieve system protection when the operations of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) are repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S108: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect set value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted thereafter.

  Step S109: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the inner frame is open and the setting key is ON. The inner frame open can be confirmed by the contact signal from the plastic frame open switch 93. The inner frame opening may be confirmed by a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 or another inner frame opening switch (not shown). Further, whether or not the setting key is ON can be confirmed by an input signal from the setting key switch 302.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the inner frame is opened and the setting key is ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S110. On the other hand, when the inner frame is opened and it can not be confirmed that the setting key is ON (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S113 (in-page connector 1 → 1).

  Step S110: The main control CPU 72 refers to the RAM clear signal by checking the specific bit of the input port value saved in the previous step S104, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S112. On the other hand, if it can not be confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S111a.

  Step S111a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “00H”.

  The setting change in progress flag is stored in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76, "00H" indicates that the normal game is in progress, "01H" indicates the setting change in progress and before confirmation, "02H" Indicates that the setting is being changed or after it is determined, and "03H" indicates that the setting is being referred to.

  The set value buffer also stores the set value, and the set value buffer is not cleared even when the RAM clear is activated. The reason for this is that “The power is turned off during the setting change and the setting is kept unchanged even if the RAM clear is activated” and “the setting change flag is changed when the setting reference condition is satisfied. Also, it does not affect the value of checksum.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the setting change flag is “00H” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S111 b. On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the value of the setting change flag is “00H” (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S114 (in-page connector 2 → 2).

  Step S111 b: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting “03H” in the setting change flag. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S114 (in-page connector 2 → 2).

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting "01H" in the setting change flag. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S120 (in-page connector 3 → 3).

  Step S113: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S120 (in-page connector 3 → 3). On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S114.

  Step S114: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of confirming whether the backup flag and the checksum are normal.

  With respect to the backup flag, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the backup flag is set (whether backup information is stored in the RAM 76). If the backup is normally ended in the process executed at the time of the previous power-off and the backup flag is set to a specific value (for example, "01H"), it is determined that the backup flag is normal. The backup flag is set to a specific value when normal backup processing is performed.

  Regarding the checksum, the main control CPU 72 executes a checksum on the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 checksums all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 except the backup flag and the checksum buffer. If the checksum result is normal, the main control CPU 72 determines that the checksum is normal.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the backup flag and the checksum are normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S116. On the other hand, when it can not confirm that the backup flag and the checksum are normal (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S120.

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes initialization processing at the time of power recovery. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the storage content of a partial area of the RAM 76. The partial area of the RAM 76 is a memory area to be cleared when power is restored.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes backup restoration processing. The main control CPU 72 restores the saved valid backup information. As a result, the main control CPU 72 can restore the power-off state.

  Step S118: The main control CPU 72 sends a command to the effect control device 124 at the time of power recovery (for example, a power recovery specification command indicating that it has recovered from power shutdown and started up) and a payout command (for the payout control device 92). Set the command to be sent. When this process ends, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S125.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initialization process (RAM clear process) when the RAM is cleared. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents of the use area of the RAM 76 to be cleared when the RAM is cleared. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, its contents are erased. The stored contents outside the area of the RAM 76 may or may not be cleared. The value of the setting change flag may or may not be cleared. If the value of the setting change flag is cleared, the determination in step S131a described later will always be negative (No). Therefore, in the case where the determination in step S131a described later is performed based on the state before clearing the RAM, the setting change It is preferable not to clear the value of the middle flag. Further, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S124: The main control CPU 71 sets a command to be sent to the effect control device 124 when the RAM is cleared (for example, a RAM clear designation command indicating that the RAM clear has been activated) and a payout command (a command for the payout control device 92). .

  Step S125: When the RAM is cleared, the main control CPU 71 executes a common initialization process when the power is restored.

  Step S126: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the payout command (power supply recovery designation command) set in step S118 or the payout command (RAM clear designation command) set in step S124 to the payout command buffer.

  Step S128: The main control CPU 72 executes a subcommand output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first outputs the effect command (power supply return designation command) set in step S118 or the effect command (RAM clear designation command) set in step S124 to the sub-command transmission buffer. In addition, the main control CPU 72, various other effect commands required for effect control (for example, model specification command, state specification command, special drawing destination determination effect command, operation memory number increase effect command, operation memory number decrease effect A command, a count cut counter value command, a normal game management phase command, a special game management phase command, a launch position designation command, etc. are set, and these are output to the sub-command transmission buffer. At this time, the main control CPU 72 can also set different values for these effect commands at the time of power return and at the time of RAM clear.

  For example, when power is restored, the value of each effect command is set based on the backup information. By transmitting these effect commands to the effect control device 124 in the subsequent sub-command transmission process (step S144), the effect control device 124 is in an effect state (eg, The internal probability state, the display mode of the effect pattern, the effect display mode of the number of stored operations, the sound output content, the light emission state of various lamps, etc.) can be restored.

  Step S130: The main control CPU 72 executes input port processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 acquires the content of each input port, stores the result of performing a predetermined operation on the value in the state flag of each input port. When this processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S131 (out-of-page connector A → A).

Step S131: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to reset the main command permission signal (communication permission signal). The main command permission signal is a signal that can be individually set by the main control CPU 72 (main controller 70) and the payout control CPU 94 (payout controller 92).
The main controller 70 and the payout controller 92 are connected by two lines, the first line is a line for signals, and the second line is a line for commands.

  For example, when the main control CPU 72 sets a main command permission signal, the payout control CPU 94 can transmit a command. On the other hand, when the payout control CPU 94 sets the main command permission signal, the main control CPU 72 can transmit a command.

  Here, since the main control CPU 72 executes the process of resetting the main command permission signal, the payout control CPU 94 is in a state in which it is impossible to transmit a command.

  When the payout command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side is not reset, the main control device 70 can transmit the command. However, since the payout command (prize ball command) is not generated during setting change or setting reference, the game ball is not paid out in the payout control device 92. When the main command permission signal can be set in the payout control device 92, the payout command permission signal on the side of the payout control device 92 may be the main command permission signal on the side of the payout control device 92.

  Here, when the main command permission signal on the main control device 70 side is reset, the payout control device 92 causes a communication error. In order to avoid a communication error, a method may be employed which communicates with the payout control device 92 and transmits a command indicating that the setting is being changed.

An advantage of adopting a method of not communicating with the payout control device 92 without setting the main command permission signal on the main control device 70 side is that there is no need to change the software of the payout control device 92.
The game ball can be prevented from being fired by resetting the firing permission signal.

  In the present embodiment, the main command permission signal is described as being a signal that can be individually set by the main control CPU 72 (main controller 70) and the payout control CPU 94 (payout controller 92). The command permission signal can be set by only the main controller 70, and can be a signal that can not be set by the payout control device 92. In this case, the payout control device 92 uses a payout command permission signal (communication permission signal) instead of the main command permission signal. Then, when the payout control device 92 sets the payout command permission signal, the main control device 70 can transmit a command to the payout control device 92, and the payout control device 92 resets the payout command permission signal. As a result, the main control unit 70 can not transmit a command to the payout control unit 92.

  Step S131a: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H” or “03H”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S132 without executing step S131 b. On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S131 b.

  Step S131 b: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a main command permission signal to a specific bit of the output port. As a result, the payout control device 92 can transmit a command to the main control device 70. As a result, if the setting is not being changed or the setting is being referred to, the game balls can be paid out.

  By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 sets a predetermined prohibition state during setting change or setting reference (during setting related processing), thereby making the payout control device 92 It is possible to execute the prohibition process not to execute the payout (prohibition process execution means).

  The payout control device 92 transmits a payout activation command (activation command) to the main control device 70 and receives the activation confirmation command in response to the payout activation command, so that the payment can be made, and from the main control device 70 in the dispensable state. The game balls are paid out based on the payout command sent.

  Further, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 prohibits the delivery start command from being sent from the delivery control device 92 to the main control device 70 by setting a predetermined inhibition state. The payout control device 92 can be prohibited from being in the payout enabled state, and the payout control device 92 can not be made to pay out the game balls (prohibition processing execution means).

  Furthermore, by executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 sets the main command permission signal (communication permission signal) on the main control device 70 side to OFF (communication non-permission), whereby a predetermined prohibition state ( The main command permission signal on the main control apparatus 70 side can be in the state of being OFF) (prohibition process execution means).

  Step S132: The main control CPU 72 resets (OFF) a specific bit of the output port to clear the emission permission signal. The release permission signal is included in the target of backup at the time of power off. Therefore, when the main control device 70 (pachinko machine 1) returns to the power supply, the release permission signal is also returned to the state at the time of the power supply cutoff.

  The release enable signal is set to a specific bit (e.g., bit 0) of the specific output port buffer (e.g., buffer for output port 3) stored in the RAM 76.

  Step S133: The main control CPU 72 sets a timer interrupt cycle. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms) in the counter setting register of the timer circuit 194.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 resets the interrupt daisy chain. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the RETI instruction after backing up the start address of the main loop processing to be described later, as preparation for the interrupt processing. By performing this process, it becomes possible to normally start the interrupt process that occurs thereafter, and to continue the process from the main loop process after the execution of the interrupt process.

  When the above procedure is executed in the CPU initialization process, the main control CPU 72 starts the execution of the main loop process of step S135. As long as the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is maintained, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the main loop process.

  When the setting function (setting change device 300) is added to the pachinko machine 1, the power-on state increases. At this time, “normal recovery (power recovery)”, “RAM clear recovery (initialization)”, “setting reference mode (refer to setting)”, “setting change mode It is necessary to divide "setting change)".

  In this embodiment, in order to divide the power-on state into four, the transition determination is performed using two input devices such as the setting key switch 302 and the RAM clear switch 304.

The transition conditions to the four states are as follows.
(1) Normal recovery sweep RAM clear switch: OFF
Setting key switch: OFF
(2) RAM clear return RAM clear switch: ON
Setting key switch: OFF
(3) Setting reference mode RAM clear switch: OFF
Setting key switch: ON
(4) Setting change mode RAM clear switch: ON
Setting key switch: ON

  Thus, the four states can be divided by the operation of the setting key switch 302 and the RAM clear switch 304.

  FIG. 12 is a diagram showing command transmission timing of the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process.

[Main controller]
When the power is turned on, the main control unit 70 waits for [A01] 3.1 seconds, and performs [A02] determination of the activation method.

  Depending on the judgment of activation method, main controller 70 is activated by [A03] initialization (RAM clear), activated by [A04] power recovery (recovery of backup information), or activated by [A05] setting change. Or by [A06] setting reference.

  Then, when [A03] initialization, [A04] power recovery, [A05] setting change or [A06] setting reference processing ends, the main control apparatus 70 sets the [A07] main command permission signal to ON, [A08] Transition to the normal game. After the main command permission signal is set to ON, it becomes possible to receive a command from the payout control device 92.

[Payout control device]
When the power is turned on, the payout control device 92 performs a wait of [B01] 0.1 seconds, and executes [B02] processing at the time of power on. In the power-on process, the payout control device 92 can set the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side to ON.

  Next, the payout control device 92 sets the [B03] payout command permission signal to ON, and shifts to the state of waiting for [B04] start command transmission. The start command transmission waiting state is a state in which the main control device 70 waits for the main command permission signal to be set to ON, and is a state in which a command can not be transmitted to the main control device 70 (see FIG. Unable to send a command to main controller 70).

  Then, in main controller 70, when the main command permission signal is set to ON ([A07]), payout control device 92 is ready to transmit a command to main controller 70 (main control (Cable transmission of command to device 70), [C01] The payout control device 92 transmits a payout activation command to the main control device 70.

The main control device 70 that has received the payout activation command transmits a [C02] activation confirmation command to the payout control device 92 as a command in response thereto.
As a result, the payout control device 92 shifts to the normal gaming state [B05], and the gaming ball can be paid out.

  During setting change or setting reference, since the game can be stopped, the command transmission from the payout control device 92 is desired to be prohibited.

  During setting change or setting reference, in order to prohibit command transmission from the payout control device 92, the following procedure is adopted in the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process. The commands transmitted from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70 are classified as follows.

(1) Disbursement start command (confirmation of dispensation operation permission)
(2) Error related command (notice of error related to payout (full error, failure error, etc.) by the effect control device)

The operation of main controller 70 at the time of receiving each command is as follows.
(3) After receiving the command of (1), the main control unit 70 returns a command for starting the dispensing operation (start confirmation command) to the payout control unit 92.
(4) After receiving the command of (2), an error command is sent to the effect control device 124.

Here, although there is no problem even if the above (4) is executed, there is a possibility that the above (3) may perform a payout operation during setting change or setting reference.
Therefore, in order not to perform the above (3), a method is employed in which a "main command permission signal" is used and command transmission is not performed.

The usage method of the main command permission signal is as follows.
The payout control device 92 confirms the “main command permission signal” on the main control device 70 side before transmitting the command. The “main command permission signal” on the main control device 70 side is a signal indicating a command receivable state of the main control device 70.
In the present embodiment, during setting change or setting reference, the “main command permission signal” is set to the OFF state on the main control unit 70 side, and the state in which the payout control unit 92 does not perform command transmission is created.

  In the main control device 70, only by setting the main command permission signal to OFF, the payment can not be performed, and no software correction is required for the payout control device 92 side. Further, main controller 70 can be designed without considering that command reception occurs during setting change or setting reference.

13 and 14 are flowcharts showing a second procedure example of the CPU initialization process.
The difference between the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process and the second procedure example of the CPU initialization process is that step S131 to step S131b of FIG. 11 are changed to step S181 to step S181b of FIG. is there. The out-of-page connector is also changed to B.
Therefore, in the following description, step S181 to step S181 b of FIG. 14 will be described, and description of the other points will be omitted.

  Step S181: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a main command permission signal (communication permission signal) in a specific bit of the output port. As a result, the payout control device 92 can transmit a command to the main control device 70.

  Step S181a: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H” or “03H”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S181 b. On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S132.

  Step S181 b: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a payout operation stop command. When the payout control device 92 receives the payout operation stop command, the payout control device 92 can not pay out the gaming balls. In this case, the payout control device 92 may shift to a state where it can not transmit a command to the main control device 70.

The payout operation stop command is transmitted in the timer interrupt process after shifting to the main loop process.
Even during the setting change or the setting change, the timer interrupt process is executed, but a processing route different from the normal game is executed. This point is the same as in the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process.
The payout operation start command can be set in the power supply restoration initialization process (CPU initialization process) at the time of power supply restoration or the initialization process (CPU initialization process) at the time of the RAM clear.
When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 executes step S132.

  By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 is a payout operation stop command for prohibiting payout of the gaming ball to the payout control device 92 during setting change or setting reference (during setting related processing). By transmitting (prohibition command), it is possible to execute the prohibition process not to make the payout control device 92 execute the payout of the game ball (prohibition process execution means).

  The payout control device 92 transmits a payout activation command (activation command) to the main control device 70, and by receiving the activation confirmation command for the payout activation command, the non-disbursement state shifts to the dispensable state, and the dispensable state The game balls are paid out based on the payout command transmitted from the main control device 70 in.

  Further, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 sends the payout operation stop command (prohibition command) to the payout control device 92 to shift the payout control device 92 to the non-disbursable state, It is possible to prevent the payout control device 92 from executing payout of gaming balls (prohibition processing execution means).

FIG. 15 is a diagram showing command transmission timing of the second procedure example of the CPU initialization process.
The dotted line in the figure indicates the time when the timer interrupt is possible.

[Main controller]
When the power is turned on, the main control unit 70 waits for [D01] 3.1 seconds, and performs [D02] determination of the activation method.

Depending on the judgment of the activation method, main controller 70 is activated by [D03] initialization (RAM clear) or activated by [D04] power recovery (restoration of backup information), [D05] main command permission Set the signal to ON. After the main command permission signal is set to ON, a command from the payout control device 92 can be received.
Further, depending on the determination of the activation method, the main control apparatus 70 is activated by changing the setting [D06] or activated by referring to the setting [D07].

  Then, when [D03] initialization, [D04] power recovery, [D06] setting change or [D07] setting reference processing ends, the main control device 70 shifts to [D08] normal game.

  [D08] In the normal game, the main control device 70 becomes capable of executing the timer interrupt process, and in the timer interrupt process, [D09] setting change, [D10] setting reference or [D11] the process related to the normal game To be executed.

[Payout control device]
When the power is turned on, the payout control device 92 waits for [E01] 0.1 seconds, and executes the processing at the time of [E02] power on. In the power-on process, the payout control device 92 can set the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side to ON.

  Next, the payout control device 92 sets the [E03] payout command permission signal to ON, and shifts to a state of waiting for [E04] start command transmission. The start command transmission waiting state is a state in which the main control device 70 waits for the main command permission signal to be set to ON, and is a state in which a command can not be transmitted to the main control device 70 (see FIG. Unable to send a command to main controller 70).

  [F01] The main control unit 70 confirms the main command permission signal on the side of the payout control device 92, and when the main command permission signal on the side of the payout control device 92 is set to ON, the main control device 70 sends a command to the payout control device 92. Send a start command.

  Then, when the main command permission signal is set to ON in the main control unit 70 ([D05]), the payout control unit 92 can transmit a command to the main control unit 70 (main control (main control (Failable to send command to device 70), [F02] The payout control device 92 sends a payout activation command to the main control device 70. The transmission of the activation command of [F01] and the transmission of the payout activation command of [F02] may be reversed in order.

  The main control device 70 that has received the payout activation command transmits a [F03] activation confirmation command to the payout control device 92 as a command responding thereto. As a result, the payout control device 92 is in a state in which the game balls can be paid out.

  [F04] The main control unit 70 transmits a payout operation stop command to the payout control unit 92 when it is activated by setting change or setting reference ([D06] or [D07]). As a result, the payout control device 92 is in a state in which the game balls can not be paid out.

[F05] The main control device 70 transmits a payout operation start command to the payout control device 92 when the process related to the setting change or the setting reference is finished. As a result, the payout control device 92 is in a state in which the game balls can be paid out.
Then, the payout control device 92 shifts to the [E05] normal gaming state.

  [E05] In the normal game, the payout control device 92 becomes capable of executing the timer interrupt process, and among the timer interrupt process, [E06] waiting for payout permission or [E07] a process relating to the normal game is executed.

  [G01] In the payout control device 92, the payout operation is disabled for 5 seconds after receiving the activation confirmation command. Therefore, by receiving the dispensing operation stop command during that time, the payout of the payout control device 92 is prohibited. That is, although the payout is permitted for a moment, since there is a weight of 5 seconds, the gaming ball is not paid out during this time. Then, since the payout operation stop command is transmitted before the 5-second weight ends, the gaming ball is not paid out. Then, in this state, setting change or setting reference is performed. Note that, for the payout operation start command, a weight of 2 seconds is set after reception.

As described above, the payout control device 92 shifts from the non-disbursable state to the dispensable state after a predetermined time has elapsed after receiving the activation confirmation command (after 5 seconds and after G01).
Then, main controller 70 transmits a dispensing operation stop command (prohibition command) before a predetermined time elapses (before 5 seconds, before G01) after transmitting the start confirmation command, and the payout control device 92 Restricts the transition from the non-disbursable state to the dispensable state (prohibition process execution means).

  During setting change or setting reference, since the game can be stopped, the payout operation of the payout control device 92 is desired to be prohibited.

  During setting change or setting reference, in order to inhibit the dispensing operation of the dispensing control device 92, the second procedure example of the CPU initialization processing adopts the following method. The commands transmitted from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70 are classified as follows.

(1) Disbursement start command (confirmation of dispensation operation permission)
(2) Error related command (informing control device of error related to payout)

The operation of main controller 70 at the time of receiving each command is as follows.
(3) After receiving the command of (1), the main control unit 70 returns a command for starting the dispensing operation (start confirmation command) to the payout control unit 92.
(4) After receiving the command of (1), an error command is transmitted to the effect control device 124.

Here, although there is no problem even if the above (4) is executed, there is a possibility that the above (3) may perform a payout operation during setting change or setting reference.
Therefore, before the game ball is actually paid out after the start confirmation command of (3) is sent, a "setting change / reference start command" is sent to the payout control device 92, and the payout control device 92 sends the game ball. Adopt a method to prevent payment.

The operation of the payout control device 92 after receiving the setting change / reference start command is as follows.
The payout control device 92 that has received the setting change / reference start command is in a payout stop state. The cancellation of the delivery stop state is triggered by a setting change / reference end command.

Here, although “setting change / reference start command” and “setting change / reference end command” may be prepared as new commands, “dispensing operation start command” and “dispensing operation stop command” may also be used. it can.
In this case, “setting change / reference start command” = “payout operation stop command”, and “setting change / reference end command” = “payout operation start command”.

  Thereby, unintended payout can be prevented during setting change or setting reference, and the software correction of the payout control device 92 becomes unnecessary by using the “dispense operation start command” and the “dispense operation stop command”. .

FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the main loop process. Each procedure will be described below.
In the main loop processing, while performing updating of random numbers (stirring random numbers etc.), the following three types of interrupts are waited for.
(1) Serial communication reception interrupt (at the time of command reception from the payout control device)
(2) Timer interrupt (when timer time-out occurs once in 4 ms)
(3) Interruption at power off notice (during input voltage drop due to power off)
And most of the processing related to the game is executed by the timer interrupt processing.

Step S141: The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt prohibition process.
Step S142: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers (for example, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the type of winning, excluding a jackpot decision random number (hardware random number) and a hit decision random number corresponding to a normal symbol (hardware random number)) Random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) are generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another timer interrupt process (step S205 in FIG. 22), but in this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all I do not have to change the random number).

  The initial value updating random number is used to change the initial value at random, and in step S142, the initial value updating random number is updated. In this process, the initial value of the jackpot symbol random number is updated. The reason for executing step S142 after inhibiting the interrupt in step S141 is to execute the same process even in another timer interrupt process (step S205 in FIG. 22), thereby preventing duplication (conflict) with this. It is for. The big hit decision random number and the hit decision random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number circuit 75, and the update cycle is faster (for example, several μs) than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). There is no need to update the decision random number and the initial value of the hit decision random number.

  Step S143: The main control CPU 72 executes main command analysis processing. In this process, when there is a command from the payout control device 92 saved by the serial communication reception interrupt, the data received from the payout control device 92 is analyzed, and a process according to the result is performed. Specifically, when the received main command is a payout start designation command, the main control CPU 72 outputs a payout start confirmation designation command to the payout command buffer, whereas when the received main command is not the payout start designation command, the received main command is After checking whether it is a value within a predetermined range (is it an appropriate value as a main command), if it is out of the range, a payout error designation command is output to the sub-command transmission buffer, and a payout radio wave according to the situation. Set the error flag.

  Step S144: The main control CPU 72 executes a subcommand transmission process. In this process, when the unsent sub-command (rendering command) remains in the sub-command transmission buffer, the main control CPU 72 causes the sub-command transmission buffer to store the sub-command stored in the sub-command transmission buffer. Send

  Step S145: The main control CPU 72 executes a performance display monitor aggregation division process. This processing is processing outside the area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of calculating a base to be displayed on the performance display monitor 200. In this process, the main control CPU 72 uses the division task to play the number of winning balls to be paid out by the game ball entering each winning opening (start winning opening, normal winning opening, big winning opening). A base is calculated by dividing by the number of outs (the number of game balls detected by the out switch) indicating the number of game balls fired in the area (base calculation means). The details of the process will be described later.

  Steps S146 and S147: The main control CPU 72 permits an interrupt and performs other random number update processing. The random numbers updated in this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) regardless of the determination of the winning type (hit type) among the software random numbers.

  The series of processes are performed in the remaining time when the main control CPU 72 executes various interrupt processes when an interrupt request is generated during execution of the main loop process.

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the contents of processing executed when a serial communication reception interrupt occurs.
If a serial communication reception interrupt has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a serial communication reception interrupt process (step S136). The serial communication reception interrupt occurs when a command from the payout control device 92 is received.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the contents of processing executed when a timer interrupt occurs.
If a timer interrupt has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes timer interrupt processing (step S137). The timer interrupt occurs at one timer time-up in a timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms).

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the contents of a process that is executed when an interrupt occurs at a power-down notice.
If a power-down notice interrupt has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a power-down notice interrupt process (step S138). The power down notice interrupt occurs when the input voltage drops due to power down.

As for the priority of the interrupt, “serial communication reception interrupt” is “high”, “timer interrupt” is “medium”, and “power interruption notice interrupt” is “low”.
Therefore, if "serial communication reception interrupt" is generated while "timer interrupt" is generated and "timer interrupt processing" is being executed, "serial communication reception interrupt processing" unless interrupt is inhibited. Run.
On the other hand, even if "interrupt on power off notice" occurs while "timer interrupt" is generated and "timer on interrupt process" is executed, "interrupt on power off notice" is executed at that time Without performing the "timer interruption processing", the "power interruption notice processing" is executed.

When various interrupt processes such as serial communication reception interrupt process (main command reception interrupt process) and timer interrupt process are completed, the process returns to the interrupt source (program address indicated by the stack pointer).
Since the power-off notice interrupt process is a special process, it is not returned to the interrupt source in principle. Normally, after save processing (checksum calculation, RWM (RAM) access protection, etc.), the occurrence of reset due to voltage drop is awaited on the spot. When the power supply is restored midway, the process returns to the beginning of the program (for example, CPU initialization processing). Note that there is also a case where it returns to the interrupt source at the beginning of the process, but this is an exceptional process.

[Serial communication reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of an example of a procedure of serial communication reception interrupt processing.
The serial communication reception interrupt process is executed when a command is received from the payout control device 92. The payout control device 92 transmits, to the main control device 70, a command for payout start designation indicating that the game has been started, and various devices (for example, the payout device substrate 100 or the The relay transmission of the command (error command etc.) transmitted to the main control apparatus 70 from the full tank switch 161 etc.) is performed. These commands transmitted by the payout control device 92 are received by the reception data register of a specific channel of the serial communication circuit 196 of the main control device 70. The main control CPU 72 executes serial communication reception interrupt processing (SCU interrupt processing) in response to the command reception (SCU interrupt). Each step of the serial communication reception interrupt process will be described below.

  Step S180: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the A register (accumulator) and F register (flag register) used during execution of the main loop processing in the save area of the RAM 76. After the values are saved, different values can be written to the respective registers during execution of the data reception interrupt process.

  Step S182: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not there is a reception error. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 checks a specific bit of the status register to check whether or not there is data in the reception data register (reception FIFO), and if there is data, whether or not it is normal data. Make sure. Then, if there is no data, or if there is data but not normal data, the main control CPU 72 determines that there is a reception error.

  If it is determined that the error is a reception error (Yes), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S184. On the other hand, when it is determined that the error is not a reception error (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S184.

  Step S184: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for saving the reception command (main command) in a buffer (reception command buffer). The stored main command is analyzed in the main command analysis process of the main loop process.

  This process is a process of rewriting the buffer of the use area of the RAM 76. For this reason, if a serial communication reception interrupt occurs during execution of processing relating to the outside of the area, the buffer of the area of use is rewritten despite execution of the processing relating to the outside of the area. There is a possibility that the gaming machine rules will be violated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when executing the serial communication reception interrupt process, the serial communication reception interrupt process is performed after the interrupt is inhibited (after the serial communication reception interrupt is inhibited).

  Steps S186 and S188: The main control CPU 72 restores the values of the A and F registers saved in step S180 to the respective registers, permits interrupts, and ends the serial communication reception interrupt processing to execute main loop processing (FIG. 16). Return to the interrupt source of).

[Power off notice interrupt processing]
FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the power-off notice interrupt process.
The power-off notice interrupt process is executed when a power-off (hereinafter, abbreviated as “power-off”) occurs.
In the main control device 70, the occurrence of the power-off and the occurrence of the reset are monitored by the same monitoring IC (for example, an IC mounted on a reset controller not shown). The monitor IC monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162, and outputs a power-down notice signal to the XINT terminal of the parallel I / O port 79 when the voltage level falls below the reference voltage. The main control CPU 72 executes an interruption process (XINT interruption process) at the time of notice of the interruption of the power supply, triggered by the input (XINT interruption) of the notice of power supply interruption to the XINT terminal.

  Steps S151 and S152: The main control CPU 72 reads the power-off detection switch input port of the parallel I / O port 79, checks a specific bit, and confirms whether or not the power-off notice signal is detected. If the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the power-off notice signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 ends the power-off notice interrupt process and returns to the interrupt source of the main loop process (FIG. 16). On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the power-off notice signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the next step S153.

  Step S153: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for clearing all output ports. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to a test signal terminal and a command control signal in addition to the output port corresponding to the normal motor combination solenoid 88, the first large winning opening solenoid 90, and the second large winning opening solenoid 97. Clear the output port buffer.

  The process of step S153 is a process that is executed when the determination in step S152 is affirmative (Yes) or when the setting change is completed (by execution of step S330 in FIG. 27).

  Step S154: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of calculating and storing a checksum. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the backup target area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup flag and the checksum buffer in units of 1 byte, and repeats the process until the addition is completed for the entire area. Then, when the calculation of the sums for all the areas is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the checksum buffer.

  Step S155: The main control CPU 72 stores a valid value (for example, "01") in the backup flag area.

  Step S156: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of prohibiting RAM (RWM) access. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 stores “00H” representing the access prohibition as the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits the access to the work area (including the used area and the outside area) of the RAM 76.

Step S157: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the power-off notice signal has been detected. The method of confirming the power-off notice signal is the same as the method in step S152 described above.
When it is confirmed that the power-off notice signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S157 again. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the power-off notice signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the next step S158.

  Step S158: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms) has elapsed in a state (off state) in which the power-off notice signal is not detected. When it is confirmed that the predetermined time has elapsed in the state where the power-off notice signal is not detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the beginning of the program. Since a program related to the CPU initialization process is disposed at the beginning of the program, returning to the beginning of the program means executing the CPU initialization process. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the predetermined time has elapsed in a state where the power-off advance notice signal has not been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S157 and repeatedly executes the processing so far. By executing such a process, when the power supply is restored (the power-off notice signal is turned off continuously for 10 ms), it is possible to return to the beginning of the program of the power-off notice upon interruption processing.

  Also, the processing of step S157 and step S158 is a standby processing that is executed in preparation for the interruption of the power supply from the power control unit 162. If the power-off notice signal is continuously detected, step S157 and step S158 are repeatedly executed, so the standby state is continued as long as the power supply is sustained. In this manner, the main control CPU 72 first calculates the checksum and saves the result before entering the standby mode after the power supply is completely cut off, and in the situation where the power supply is being shut off Keeping the standby state without executing the process, the power supply coming off in a safe state is cut off (the reset is awaited due to a voltage drop).

  When the power supply from the power control unit 162 is cut off, the power supply source to the main control device 70 is automatically switched to the backup power supply. Since main controller 70 is supplied with backup power from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on main controller 70) after occurrence of a power failure, backup target of RAM 76 is The contents of the memory are retained without loss even after power-off. The backup power supply circuit may be built in the power control unit 162.

  Through the above processing, all information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum addition target) is held as storage in the RAM 76 even after the power is turned off. Further, the stored storage is restored as backup information at the time of the occurrence of the power-off, after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous CPU initialization processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of timer interrupt processing.
The main control CPU 72 executes timer interrupt processing (PTC interrupt processing) every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request (PTC interrupt) output by the timer circuit 194. Hereinafter, each procedure of the timer interrupt process will be described.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the AF register (pair of accumulator and flag register), BC, DE, HL (pair of general purpose registers) used during execution of the main loop processing in the save area of the RAM 76. Evacuate to After the value is saved, another value can be written to each register during execution of the timer interrupt process.

  Step S201: The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt flag initialization process. In this process, a process of clearing (= 0) the timer interrupt flag is executed. The timer interrupt flag is cleared because the timer interrupt occurs at a predetermined timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms), but the timer interrupt flag is set (= 1) at a predetermined timer interrupt cycle. When the timer interrupt flag is set, the generation of the timer interrupt is not permitted.

  Step S201a: The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt permission process. Here, by permitting the interrupt, it becomes possible to generate another interrupt while executing the subsequent steps of the timer interrupt process.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes dynamic port output processing. In this process, in order to control lighting of each of the lamps mounted on the integrated display substrate 89 and the performance display monitor 200 by a dynamic lighting method, port output in common unit is performed. Specifically, after clearing the output port, the main control CPU 72 outputs the generated data for common output to the port output buffer for common corresponding to the selected common. The content to be output is the content set by the previous timer interrupt.

  Here, data output to the port output buffer for each common is port-outputted sequentially one common at a time in the dynamic port output processing each time timer interrupt processing occurs. For example, in the timer interrupt process to be executed next time, the data stored for Common 1 is output to the port, and in the timer interrupt process to be executed next to the next, the data stored for Common 2 is output to the port. Data stored in the port output buffer for each common is processed one by one in order. In this way, each lamp constituting the predetermined display mode (a mode for displaying the variation display or stop display of the symbol, the operation memory number display, the game state display, etc.) or the performance display monitor is sequentially driven in common units and the dynamic lighting system Lighting control is performed by.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes port input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 calculates the logic between the input value of various switch signals from the parallel I / O port 79 and the inversion result value of the previous input value in order to accurately acquire the latest switch state based on the input port information. Store the product in the input port on detection flag. As a result, by the value (ON / OFF) of the input port on detection flag, it becomes possible to grasp an accurate input state based on the change from the previous time of various switch signals. Various switch signals include the passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right start winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning opening switch 86, the first 2 includes a winning detection signal from the winning opening switch 81, a detection signal from a fraud detection switch (not shown) (magnetic detection switch, radio wave detection switch, vibration detection switch, etc.) and the like.

  Step S204: The main control CPU 72 executes a timer update process. In this processing, the main control CPU 72, in addition to various timers (timers for managing the fluctuation time / stop time of the symbol, the open time / close time of the motorized part, etc.) used for the game, various timers for external information, security signal A process (subtraction process etc.) for updating a counter such as a timer is executed.

  Step S205: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value random number update process. The contents of the process are the same as the initial value random number update process (step S142 in FIG. 16) of the main loop process.

  Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning symbol random number updating process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery of special symbols and ordinary symbols. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and loops within a prescribed range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

  Step S206a: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H” or “03H”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S206b. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the setting is being changed or is being referred to (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S207.

  The reason for executing such a determination process is to prevent the process related to the normal game from being executed when the setting is being changed and the setting is being referred to. And, during the setting change or setting reference, by not executing the processing related to the normal game in the timer interrupt processing, the load of the program of the main control device 70 can be reduced.

  Step S206b: The main control CPU 72 executes setting change processing. By executing this process, the main control CPU 72 executes setting related processing including at least one of setting changing processing performed when changing the setting or setting reference processing performed when referring to the setting. (Setting related processing execution means). The details of the process will be described later. The setting related processing includes processing performed during setting change or setting reference. Then, when the setting change process is completed, the main control CPU 72 executes step S217a. The reason for shifting to step S217a is to output an external signal (security signal) in the external information management process.

  Step S207: The main control CPU 72 executes switch management processing. In this process, the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right start winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85 among the switch signals input in the previous port input processing (step S203). Based on the winning detection signal from the first winning opening switch 86 and the second winning opening switch 81, the event occurring during the game is determined, and the processing corresponding to each occurring event is executed. The details of the process will be described later.

  In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 is an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that is an opportunity (lottery opportunity) has occurred. In addition, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred.

  Step S208: The main control CPU 72 executes an addition number calculation process. This processing is processing of the used area. In this process, the main control CPU 72, the game state, each switch (out switch 99, middle start winning opening switch 80, right start winning opening switch 82, first winning opening switch 86, second winning opening switch 81, the first Check the state of the count switch 84, the second count switch 85, etc.) and calculate the value to be added to the out-of-area RAM (number of winning balls generated during 4 ms, number of additions, etc.) for base calculation. Calculate Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing to determine the values of the number of fired balls A (normal out additive number), the number of fired balls B (total out additive number), and the number of acquired balls (normal award ball additive number) Do. The details of the process will be described later.

  Steps S209 and S210: The main control CPU 72 executes special game management processing and normal game management processing. These processes are for advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1 specifically.

  In the special game management process (step S209), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device The variable display or stop display by 35 is determined, or the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the process will be described later.

  Further, in the normal game management process (step S210), the main control CPU 72 determines variable display or stop display by the normal symbol display device 33, or controls the operation of the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. Do. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores the random number (normally determined random number per symbol) acquired with the passage of the start gate 20 as a trigger in the previous switch management process (step S207), and in the normal game management process The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is judged whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range. When the random number value falls within the hit range, the main control CPU 72 controls the normal motor combination solenoid 88 after the normal symbol is variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 33 and the stop display of the normal symbol is performed in the predetermined hit mode. It excites and operates the variable start winning device 28. On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs the stop display of the normal symbol in the form of the offset after the fluctuation display.

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes state management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 is recovered to the back of the game board unit 8 (a state where the number of balls entered into the middle start winning port 26 and the normal winning ports 22 and 24 is abnormally high) Error condition such as the total number of winning balls to each winning opening 22, 24, 26, 28a, 30b, 31b is larger than the number of playing balls, ie, the number of playing balls thrown into the game area 8a. Check if it has occurred. When an error condition is detected, the main control CPU 72 generates an abnormality by outputting a security signal to the hall computer of the game arcade and by transmitting a predetermined error command to the effect control device 124. To notify. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may execute an error process related to door opening or fraud detection (magnet, radio wave, vibration, etc.).

  Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning opening switch process. In this process, when each input port on detection flag stored based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous port input process (step S203) is ON, Each target winning ball control counter is incremented by one and updated.

  Step S213: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first confirms whether the payout command buffer is not empty (is the payout command to be transmitted set or not), and if it is not empty (the payout command is set), the payout command is The various dispensing commands output to the buffer are transmitted to the dispensing control device 92. For example, a payout command indicating a start mode at the time of power-on is set in the process of the CPU initialization process, is output to the payout command buffer, and a payout command indicating the start mode is transmitted in this process. On the other hand, if the payout command buffer is empty, the process proceeds to the processing for instructing the payout of the winning balls. The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the prize ball control counter is not 0. If the prize ball control counter is not 0, the payout control device 92 is a payout command for designating the number of prize balls corresponding to this counter. Send to More specifically, a payout ball designation payout command corresponding to each prize ball control counter is transmitted in this process. As for the transmission of the payout command, a payout command permission signal is inputted from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and the number of payout commands set in the transmission data register (transmission FIFO) is a predetermined number. If it is less than this (more specifically, if the dispensing command set in the transmission FIFO has already been transmitted, or if it is currently being transmitted and the transmission FIFO has an empty space), it is executed.

  Further, particularly when the power is turned on, when the payout command set in the process of the CPU initialization process is normally transmitted, the main control CPU 72 turns on the firing permission signal. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the payout command buffer output when the power is turned on, and turns on the release permission signal by setting a specific bit of the output port. Thus, after confirming the normal operation after the power is turned on, the firing of the gaming ball is permitted, and the firing permission signal is sent to the firing control board 108 through the payout control device 92, whereby the firing of the gaming ball is possible. State.

  Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the contents of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the payout control management process. When a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, the first profit (for example, 15 game balls) Generate a corresponding prize ball content command. Note that generating a command means storing the command in the sub-command transmission buffer (the same applies hereinafter). In addition, when the winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, a winning ball content command corresponding to the second profit (for example, 10 game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 16) of the main loop process.

[Regarding the number of winning balls and the number of winning gaming balls]
The number of winning balls of the starting opening of the first special symbol and the number of winning balls of the starting opening of the second special symbol are respectively set to one or more specified numbers. Also, the number of winning balls may be made different between the starting opening of the first special symbol and the starting opening of the second special symbol. Furthermore, based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of acquired game balls (average number of balls obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time saving state), the lowest winning ball number is set You may Furthermore, the probability of winning special symbols, the expected value of the total number of acquired game balls, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winnings of the big winning opening, and the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the condition is satisfied, a big hit may be set such that the number of winning game balls per one big hit is less than 1⁄4 of the maximum number of winning ball games.

  Step S215: The main control CPU 72 executes test signal management processing. This processing can be processing outside the region. In this process, the main control CPU 72 is in its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, launch position specification state, big hit, small hit, probability fluctuation function being activated, time shortening function being activated, etc. Generates various test signals representing H.) and stores them in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

  Step S216: The main control CPU 72 executes an LED display setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, the second special A process is performed to generate data for common output for controlling the lighting of the LEDs included in the symbol operation memory lamp 35a, the gaming state display device 38, and the like. The process related to the performance display monitor 200 is executed in the performance display monitor control process.

  More specifically, the main control CPU 72 is based on the special game management process (step S209) and the variation display or stop display of symbols determined in the normal game management process (step S210), the number of activated memories, the game state display, etc. A drive signal for lighting each lamp in a corresponding manner is generated as data for common output.

  Step S217: The main control CPU 72 executes a solenoid data setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the ordinary electric role solenoid 88, the first winning prize port solenoid 90, and the second winning game generated in the special game management process (step S209) or the normal game management process (step S210). The drive signals of the port solenoid 97, test signals and the like are combined (combined) and stored in the port output buffer. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 executes solenoid data port output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a value is stored in each output buffer (port output buffer), and when a value is stored, the port is output. For example, the drive signal of each solenoid 88, 90, 97 stored in the port output buffer is port-outputted. In this case, each drive signal is transmitted to the corresponding solenoid 88, 90, 97, and each solenoid executes an operation according to the drive signal.

Step S217a: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an external information management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends an external information signal to the hall computer of the game arcade through the external terminal board 160 (for example, winning ball information, door opening information, symbol determination frequency information, big hit information, starting opening information, security signal, etc.) In the port output request buffer.
In the external information management process, an external signal (security signal) is output in the case of "setting change or setting reference".

  In the present embodiment, among the various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” as the big hit information is outputted to the outside, so that the external electronic device connected to the pachinko machine 1 (data display Can provide a variety of jackpot information (external information signal output means). That is, by dividing and outputting the big hit information into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the type (winning type) of big hit from these combinations can be totaled / managed by a hall computer (not shown), or internally Recognize changes in probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate small hits (hits that the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a "big hit" even if not elected Can be calculated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example by the data display device (not shown) to count and display the number of big hit occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1 and recognize whether it is currently a big hit for each platform It is also possible to recognize whether or not the symbol variation time is currently being shortened for each table. In this external information management process, the main control CPU 72 controls in detail the output state (set of ON or OFF) of each of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5".

  Step S218: The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt prohibition process.

  Step S218a: The main control CPU 72 executes register save processing.

  Step S219: The main control CPU 72 executes a performance display monitor control process. This processing is processing outside the area. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 executes processing such as switching of the display content of the performance display monitor 200, or the value of the base calculated in the performance display monitor aggregation division processing of the main loop processing (step S145 in FIG. 16). A process of generating a drive signal for displaying on the performance display monitor 200 as data for common output is executed. The details of the process will be described later.

  Step S219a: The main control CPU 72 executes register restoration processing. As a result, the value of the register saved in the process of step S218a is restored.

Step S220: The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt permitting process. Here, by permitting the interrupt, it becomes possible to generate another interrupt while executing the subsequent steps of the timer interrupt process. As described above, in the timer interrupt process, multiple interrupts are permitted.
Note that acceptance of an interrupt request signal, priority control of multiple interrupts, and the like are executed by the interrupt controller 192.

  Step S221: The main control CPU 72 executes a launch position management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining the launch position of the gaming ball according to the progress of the game (launch position determination means). In addition, this processing may be executed in the special game management processing. The details of the process will be described later.

  Step S222: The main control CPU 72 restores the values of the HL, DE, BC, and AF registers saved at step S200 to the respective registers, ends the timer interrupt processing, and returns to the main loop processing of the CPU initialization processing.

[Interrupt management by interrupt controller]
In main controller 70, an XINT interrupt (interrupt request output from parallel I / O port 79 which is the source of interrupt processing upon power-off notice) is executed during execution of the CPU initialization process which is the main control program, SCU interrupt (Interrupt request output by the serial communication circuit 196 that is the source of serial communication reception interrupt processing), PTC interrupt (interrupt request output by the timer circuit 194 that is the source of timer interrupt processing) may occur. These interrupt requests are managed and controlled by an interrupt controller 192 implemented in the main controller 70. The interrupt controller 192 performs control (so-called maskable interrupt control) that permits acceptance of an interrupt request by an interrupt permission instruction (EI instruction) of the main control CPU 72 and prohibits acceptance of an interrupt request by an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). ing.

  Since the XINT interrupt, the SCU interrupt, and the PTC interrupt all occur on the basis of independent generation factors having no interdependence, it is naturally conceivable that a plurality of interrupt requests occur simultaneously. Therefore, the interrupt controller 192 controls each interrupt request according to the priority order of interrupt requests determined in advance in consideration of the degree of importance of interrupt processing, processing efficiency, and the like.

  More specifically, the priority of the interrupt request (interrupt processing) is defined in the interrupt vector table, and the priority of the XINT interrupt (interrupt processing at power off notice) is the lowest and PTC interrupt (timer interrupt processing). The priority is the next highest, and the priority of the SCU interrupt (serial communication reception interrupt processing) is set to the highest (see FIGS. 17 to 19).

  Since the setting of the interrupt vector table is made at the beginning of the CPU initialization process, the interrupt controller 192 can perform priority control of interrupt requests that occur at subsequent timings. Actually, if any interrupt request is generated after the CPU initialization processing transitions to the main loop processing and before the interrupt is prohibited after the interrupt is permitted, the interrupt controller 192 receives the accepted interrupt request. Control based on the priority set in the interrupt vector table. For example, when the XINT interrupt and the PTC interrupt are simultaneously received, a higher priority PTC interrupt (timer interrupt process) is processed first. While the timer interrupt process is being executed, the XINT interrupt waits for an interrupt, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the XINT interrupt (interrupt process upon power-off notice) is executed.

  By controlling the interrupt request based on the priority in this manner, the interrupt controller 192 enables the main controller 70 to execute multiple interrupts.

[Dynamic port output processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a dynamic port output process. Each step will be described below.

  Step S160: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the output port 0. This clears the display on the main display. The output port 0 is a port that outputs data related to the main display.

  Step S161: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the output port 2. Thereby, the display of the performance display monitor 200 is cleared. The output port 2 is a port that outputs data related to the performance display monitor 200.

  The reason why the processing in steps S160 and S161 is performed is that in the case of the dynamic lighting method, if the display is not erased, the control processing may run away when referring to the common data.

  In addition, after the process of step S160 and step S161, the process of waiting for the blanking time end can be executed. By this waiting time, display data can be erased and data can be output after a predetermined time has elapsed. This waiting time is also a waiting time for avoiding a control process runaway. Note that the processing of steps S162 and S163 described below may be performed during this waiting time.

  Step S162: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of updating the common counter in the range of 0 to 3. As a result, the common number to be output is updated.

  Step S163: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of acquiring common data corresponding to the common counter. Thereby, data corresponding to the common to be output can be acquired.

  Step S164: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of outputting common data to the output port 1. By outputting the common data to the output port 1, the common data can be output while switching the common. The output port 1 is a port that outputs data specifying a common number (common 0 to 3) corresponding to the common counter.

  Step S165: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for acquiring display data according to the common counter. Display data is stored in the RAM of the used area.

  The display data to be acquired is roughly divided into two data, the first data being data for the main display, and the second data being data for the performance display monitor 200.

  Data for the first main display is generated as data for common output in the LED display setting process (FIG. 61).

  The data for the second performance display monitor 200 may be generated as data for displaying a base in the performance display monitor display process (step S646) of the performance display monitor control process (FIG. 65), and the setting is changed. The data may be generated as data for displaying the setting value in steps S334 to S346 of the process (FIG. 28).

  Here, with regard to the second data for performance display monitor 200, since the display data is set to the common 0 to 3 common buffer both when displaying the base and when displaying the set value, the past data Data is overwritten.

  And the process of step S169 of FIG. 23 and the process of step S173 of FIG. 24 are the same processes as the process, but when executing the process of step S169 of FIG. Since data on the setting value is stored in the buffer, the performance display monitor 200 displays the content on the setting value. On the other hand, when the process of step S173 of FIG. 24 is executed, the data regarding the base is stored in the common 0-3 common buffer, so the content regarding the base is displayed on the performance display monitor 200.

  Step S166: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H” or “03H”.

  As a result, if it can not be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S167a. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S169.

  Step S167a: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of outputting to the output port 0. Specifically, the process of setting the display of the main display is performed. As a result, the data specified by the specified common is output. The data output here is common output data generated by the LED display setting processing, and each lamp mounted on the integrated display substrate 89 by setting the common output data to the common port output buffer. Lighting can be controlled by a dynamic lighting method.

Step S167b: The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt disabling process.
Step S167c: The main control CPU 72 executes a register save process.

  Step S168a: The main control CPU 72 executes a performance display monitor output process. This processing is processing outside the area. Therefore, this process is performed after the interrupt disable process is performed. By executing this process, the data specified by the specified common is output. The details of the process will be described later.

  By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 can execute processing (base related processing) for displaying a base on the performance display monitor 200 as processing included in processing outside the area (second processing). Yes (second process execution means).

Step S168b: The main control CPU 72 executes register return processing.
Step S168c: The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt permitting process.

  Step S169: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of outputting to the output port 2. Specifically, a process of setting the display of the performance display monitor 200 (a process of outputting the display data acquired in the process of step S165 to the output port 2) is executed. This processing is processing of the used area. By executing this process, the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200 during setting change or setting reference. The processing other than the processing in step S168a can be processing of the used area.

  By executing such processing, the buffer contents of the use area can be output to the main display during normal gaming, and the buffer contents outside the area can be output to the performance display monitor 200. On the other hand, while the setting is being changed and the setting is being referred to, the buffer contents of the used area can be output to the performance display monitor 200, and the main display can be cleared to display nothing.

  In the pachinko machine 1, there are cases where 7-segment LEDs are not present in the main display (when a plurality of dot LEDs are geometrically arranged). In such a situation, in order to display setting values in an easy-to-understand manner, it is necessary to use the 7-segment LED of the performance display monitor 200. At this time, there is a regular concern in performing the process outside the area (a concern that the process is not performed in the area of use despite the processing relating to the game).

Since the process regarding the performance display monitor 200 is permitted to be performed outside the area, basically, the display process of the performance display monitor 200 is performed outside the area.
However, among the display process of the 7-segment LED of the performance display monitor, the process of displaying the setting value is likely to be a process related to a game, so it is executed in the use area.

  Thereby, the process of displaying the setting value on the performance display monitor 200 can be executed in the use area, and regular concern can be avoided.

  By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can execute the process of displaying the set value on the performance display monitor 200 as the process included in the process of the use area (first process) (first process). Process execution means).

  When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

[Performance display monitor output processing]
FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the performance display monitor output process. Each step will be described below.

  Step S170: The main control CPU 72 executes a stack pointer save process. This process saves the stack pointer of the used area.

  Step S171: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a stack pointer outside the area.

  Step S172: The main control CPU 72 executes register save processing. To save the register, use the stack pointer outside the area.

Step S173: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of outputting data.
Specifically, processing of setting the display of the performance display monitor 200 (processing of outputting the display data acquired in the processing of step S165 of FIG. 23 to the output port 2) is executed. By executing this processing, the base is displayed on the performance display monitor 200 during the normal game.

The present process is the same process as step S169 in FIG. 23, but the contents of the data output to the output port 2 (the contents displayed on the performance display monitor 200) are different.
In this process (step S173), since data on the base is acquired in step S165 of FIG. 23, data on the base is output to the output port 2, and the content on the base is displayed on the performance display monitor 200.
On the other hand, in step S169 in FIG. 23, since data relating to the set value is acquired in step S165 in FIG. 23, data relating to the set value is output to output port 2 and content relating to the set value is displayed on performance display monitor 200. .

  Since the output of the common is performed in the processing relating to the use area (in order to use the common common number; refer to step S164 in FIG. 23), in this processing, the processing of outputting only data is executed. As a result, the data specified by the specified common is output. The data output here is common output data generated by the performance display monitor display processing, and the performance display monitor is set by setting the common output data (base display data) in the port output buffer for common. The lighting of each lamp mounted on 200 can be controlled by a dynamic lighting method.

  Specifically, the main control CPU 72 switches to the performance display monitor 200 by switching either the previous base or the current base at preset intervals along with the corresponding identifier "bL." Or "b6." Executes processing to set common output data to be displayed in the port output buffer. The display contents on the performance display monitor 200 are controlled based on the common output data (drive signal) set here.

  Step S166: The main control CPU 72 executes register return processing.

Step S167: The main control CPU 72 executes stack pointer return processing. By executing this process, after returning to the stack pointer of the used area, it returns to the process related to the used area.
When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the dynamic port output process (FIG. 23).

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing the relationship between timer interrupt processing and dynamic port output processing.
The timer interrupt is an interrupt whose interrupt priority is lower than that of the serial communication reception interrupt (see FIGS. 17 to 19).
Here, bold dotted arrows in the figure indicate interrupt disabled sections (dotted arrows A1 to A3), and bold solid arrows in the figure indicate interrupt enabled sections (solid arrows B1 to B3).

  In the timer interrupt process, first, a register save process (S200) and an interrupt flag initialization process (S201) are executed. This section is an interrupt disabled section (see dotted arrow A1).

  When an interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 (program, assembler) of this embodiment is automatically in the same state as when using an instruction to prohibit the interrupt. Therefore, when the timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is internally disabled (as hardware). Therefore, in order to permit an interrupt, it is necessary to execute an interrupt permitting process.

  Therefore, in the timer interrupt process, next, the interrupt permission process (S201a) is executed. By executing this process, the interrupt enabled section is started (see solid arrow B1).

  When the dynamic port output process (S202) is called from the timer interrupt process, in the dynamic port output process, a process of clearing the output port 0 and a process of clearing the output port 2 are executed (S160, S161). This section is an interrupt enabled section (see solid arrow B1).

  In the dynamic port output process, next, the interrupt prohibition process (S167b) is executed. By executing this process, the interrupt disabled section is started (see dotted arrow A2).

  In the dynamic port output process, a register save process (S167c), a performance display monitor output process (S168a), and a register recovery process (S168b) are further executed. This section is an interrupt disabled section (see dotted arrow A2).

  Finally, in the dynamic port output process, an interrupt permission process (S168c) is executed. By executing this process, the interrupt enabled section is started (see solid arrow B2).

  The process returns from the dynamic port output process to the timer interrupt process to execute various processes. This section is an interrupt enabled section (see solid arrow B2).

In the timer interrupt process, next, the interrupt disable process (S218) is executed. By executing this process, the interrupt disabled section is started (see a dotted arrow A3).
In the timer interrupt process, a register save process (S218a), a performance display monitor control process (S219), and a register return process (S219a) are further executed. This section is an interrupt disabled section (see dotted arrow A3).

  Then, in the timer interrupt process, an interrupt permission process (S220) is executed. By executing this process, the interrupt enabled section is started (see solid arrow B3).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since "serial communication reception interrupt processing" having a higher interrupt priority than "timer interrupt processing" is set, "performance display monitor control processing (S219)" and "performance display monitor output" In the process (S165), the process is executed after disabling the interrupt.

Therefore, during execution of "performance display monitor control process (S219)" and "performance display monitor output process (S165)", even if "serial communication reception interrupt" with high interrupt priority occurs, there is no interruption. The "performance display monitor control process (S219)" and the "performance display monitor output process (S165)" are continuously executed.
In this case, the "performance display monitor control process" and the "performance display monitor output process" are completed, and the "serial communication reception interrupt process" is executed at the timing when the interrupt is permitted. Since the reception data related to the interrupt is stored in the reception buffer, even if the timing for taking out the reception data is delayed, no problem occurs because the processing on the reception data is executed thereafter.

[Process content of main control CPU 72]
The main control CPU 72 executes timer interrupt processing (first processing) (first processing execution means). In addition, when a serial communication reception interrupt (predetermined interrupt) occurs during execution of timer interrupt processing, the main control CPU 72 interrupts execution of the timer interrupt processing and serial communication reception interrupt processing (different from timer interrupt processing ( The second process is executed (second process execution means).

  The timer interrupt process (first process) includes an interrupt permitting process for permitting a serial communication reception interrupt, and an interrupt non-permission process not for permitting a serial communication reception interrupt, which is a process for monitoring the ball history.

The interrupt permission process is a process (special game management process or the like) excluding the process related to the use area, for example, the "performance display monitor control process (S219)" and the "performance display monitor output process (S165)".
The interrupt non-permission process is a process related to the outside of the area, for example, "performance display monitor control process (S219)" and "performance display monitor output process (S165)".

  When executing the interrupt non-permission process, the main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt non-permission process in a state in which the serial communication reception interrupt is prohibited (first process execution means).

  Further, when executing the interrupt non-permission process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process for prohibiting the serial communication reception interrupt before executing the interrupt non-permission process, executes the interrupt non-permission process, and executes the interrupt non-permission process. After execution, processing for permitting serial communication reception interruption is executed (first processing execution means).

  The interrupt non-permission process is a part of the process of calculating the base. Some of the processes for calculating the base are “performance display monitor control process (S219)” and “performance display monitor output process (S165)”.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a modification of timer interrupt processing.
The timer interrupt process has been described in the order of the process shown in FIG. 22, but may be modified as follows.

  The processing order of the timer interrupt processing is as follows: [1] Dynamic port output processing, [2] Addition number calculation processing (at least winning detection and calculation of winning balls count), and [3] Performance display monitor control processing.

  [1] The reason why the dynamic port output process is given the highest priority is to make the common switching timing and the data display time constant. Therefore, [1] dynamic port output processing is performed in the first half (early stage) of the timer interrupt processing.

  [2] The reason why priority is given to the calculation of the number of additions next is that in the performance display monitor control process, the number of prize balls used and the number of outs are calculated in advance within the use area. This is because it is necessary to carry out prior to the display monitor control process.

  [3] The reason why the performance display monitor control process is given the last priority is that the performance display monitor control process needs to be executed after the end of the addition number calculation process.

  The processing to be inserted into [A], [B] or [C] in the figure is not limited to the arrangement example of FIG. 22, and arbitrary processing (input port update processing, input port edge detection processing, winning opening Determination processing, processing related to special symbols, processing related to normal symbols, processing related to errors, processing related to external output, processing related to test signal output, port output processing, etc. can be inserted.

  At this time, the value of the calculated base becomes a different value depending on whether the process related to the special symbol (special game management process) is performed before or after the addition number calculation process. The reason for this is that since it is judged in the addition number calculation processing whether or not a big hit is in progress, there are cases where counting the number of outs, which is the denominator of the base value, and cases where it does not count.

  Specifically, if the processing related to the special symbol is prior to the calculation of the addition number, then if the processing related to the special symbol is a big hit and an out switch is detected within one interrupt, then the out is detected. There is no counting of the number (detection of the out switch is excluded from the calculation of the base judging that the jackpot is medium).

  On the other hand, when the processing related to the special symbol is after the addition number calculation processing, if it becomes a big hit in the processing related to the special symbol within one interruption and the out switch is detected, the out number is counted (The detection of the out switch is valid and not excluded from the calculation of the base because it has not yet been considered a jackpot at the time of the calculation of the number of additions).

  As described above, the value of the base changes depending on whether the processing related to the special symbol is arranged before or after the addition calculation processing, but the processing related to the special symbol is a game specification or a base to be calculated. Depending on the contents of the above, it can be placed at any place in the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 are flowcharts showing an example procedure of setting change processing.
Step S300: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading a set value buffer. Thereby, the main control CPU 72 can obtain the current setting value.

  Step S302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S304. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S308.

  Step S304: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed. In the present embodiment, since the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are shared, pressing of the RAM clear switch 304 is confirmed here, but the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are shared. If the setting change switch is separately provided, it is checked in this process whether or not the setting change switch is pressed.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S306. On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S308.

  Step S306: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding 1 to the set value. For example, when the setting value loaded in step S300 is “0 (setting 1)”, when this processing is executed, the setting value becomes “1 (setting 2)”. When the setting value loaded in step S300 is “1 (setting 2)”, when this process is executed, the setting value becomes “2 (setting 3)”. When the setting value loaded in step S300 is "5 (setting 6)", when this processing is executed, the setting value returns to "0 (setting 1)".

  Here, when the setting value loaded in step S300 is "5 (setting 6)", by executing this processing, the setting value is set to "6 (out of range)" without returning to the original value, and the next A process of correcting to “0 (setting 1)” may be performed in steps S308 and S310.

  Step S308: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the set value is in the range of “0 (setting 1)” to “5 (setting 6)”. This process is a process for avoiding the setting of an unintended setting value.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting value is in the range of “0 (setting 1)” to “5 (setting 6)” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S312. On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the setting value is in the range of “0 (setting 1)” to “5 (setting 6)” (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S310.

  Step S310: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting "0 (setting 1)". Thus, when an unintended setting value is set, "0 (setting 1)" can be set.

  Step S312: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S314. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S322 (in-page connector 1 → 1).

Step S312: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the setting key has changed from ON to OFF. The main control CPU 72 can determine that the setting key has changed from ON to OFF when the input signal from the setting key switch 302 changes from ON to OFF.
The present determination process may be a process of determining whether the setting key (setting key switch 302) is OFF.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S316. On the other hand, if it can not be confirmed that the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S334 (out-of-page connector C → C).

  Step S316: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting “02H (during setting change and after confirmation)” to the setting change in progress flag.

  Step S318: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating a “setting confirmation designation command” as a sub command. The “setting confirmation designation command” can include information that the setting has been confirmed, and information of the setting value.

  Step S320: The main control CPU 72 executes a sub-command set process. By executing this process, the “setting confirmation designation command” is set in the sub-command transmission buffer. The set “setting confirmation designation command” is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process. When the present process ends, next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S332 (in-page connector 2 → 2).

  Step S322: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the setting key is ON or the inner frame is open.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting key is ON or the inner frame is opened (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S332 (in-page connector 2 → 2). On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the setting key is ON or the inner frame is open (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S324.

Step S324: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of updating the inner frame closing timer.
In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value to the inner frame closing timer when the inner frame (for example, the inner frame assembly 7) is closed, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time. Do.

  Step S324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the inner frame closing timer has timed out. Specifically, if the value of the inner frame closing timer has not yet become 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the inner frame closing timer has not timed out (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 executes step S334 (out-of-page connector C → C).

  Thereafter, when the value of the inner frame closing timer becomes 0 with the elapse of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the inner frame closing timer has timed out (Yes), and executes step S328.

  Step S328: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to clear the setting change in progress flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the setting change flag to “0”.

  Step S330: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to shift to processing upon completion of setting change. Specifically, the process of shifting to step S152a (step S153) of FIG. 21 is executed by the jump instruction (outside page connector “shifting to processing upon completion of setting change” → “when completion of setting change”).

  When setting change and setting reference are finished by executing such processing, the state shifts to the reset state. Specifically, the process jumps to save processing at power off. Then, at the jump destination, after the checksum calculation, the power supply is confirmed, and the process returns to the beginning of the program (CPU initialization process). Thereby, the program configuration is "initialization → setting change or setting reference (temporary main loop) → initialization after setting change → original main loop", "initialization → main loop (normal game, Configuration change and configuration)).

Here, when the setting function (setting change device 300) is added to the pachinko machine 1, the process at the time of power on, (1) initialization process, (2) main loop process during setting change, (3) setting It is necessary to have a configuration of reinitialization processing after change (display clear processing, RAM reclear processing, transition processing to a normal game, etc.), and (4) main loop processing in the game.
As described above, when the setting function is added, in addition to the setting change processing itself, processing before and after the setting change processing is also required, so that the amount of program code is significantly increased.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, processing at power on (at least a part of CPU initialization processing) and save processing at the time of power off notice (at least a part of interrupt process at power off notice), It is also used as processing after completion of the setting change.

  Specifically, in the setting change process called during the timer interrupt, when the setting change or the setting reference end condition is satisfied, the process does not return to the timer interrupt process, and the save process at the power off notice (interrupt process at power off notice) In the middle of

  In the save processing at power off notice, all output ports are cleared and the checksum is calculated and saved. After that, the power remains on, so the program returns to the beginning of the program (CPU initialization process), and the power is restored. Transition to the normal gaming state through the same initialization process.

  As described above, the processing after the setting change ends, by combining the processing at the time of power on and the save processing at the notice of the power off, compared with the case where the processing after the setting change is performed by a dedicated program, The amount of increase can be suppressed.

  Step S332: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to clear the inner frame closing timer. Then, when the present process is completed, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S334 (out-of-page connector C → C).

  Step S334: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the display data "rn." In the common 0 and 1 buffers.

  Step S336: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S338. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S340.

  Step S338: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting data corresponding to "-" as display data in the common 2 buffer. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S342.

  Step S340: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting data corresponding to "blank (not displayed)" as display data in the common 2 buffer. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S342.

  Step S342: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of loading a set value buffer. As a result, the main control CPU 72 can acquire the setting value after the setting change or the like.

  Step S344: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of converting the setting value into display data.

  Step S346: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the display data converted by the process of step S344 in the common 3 buffer as the display data.

  For example, when the setting value is “5 (setting 6)” and the setting is being changed and before the setting is determined, the four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 of the performance display monitor 200 sequentially select “r” from the left side. "N." "-" "6" is displayed. In addition, when the setting value is “0 (setting 1)”, and the setting is being changed, and before the setting is determined, the four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 of the performance display monitor 200 sequentially “r” from the left “N.” “Blank (not displayed)” “1” is displayed.

  That is, the display mode of "r" "n." "-" "Set value" of the performance display monitor 200 is the display mode (first display mode) during the setting change, and "r" "of the performance display monitor 200" The display modes "n. blank space (not displayed)" and "set value" are display modes (second display mode) during setting reference.

By executing such processing, the performance display monitor 200 displays setting values in different display modes during setting change and setting value reference, and displays the setting values as a base. Can be displayed.
When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

Switch Management Processing
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of an exemplary procedure of the switch management process. Each step will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has been generated) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. If the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol storage update process. The contents of the specific processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery trigger has been generated) from the right start winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory updating process. Also here, the contents of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes the first large winning opening count processing. In the first large winning opening count processing, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 per round during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S21a.

  Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. If the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21 b and executes the second large winning opening count processing. In the second large winning opening count processing, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. If the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the current number of normal symbol operation memory numbers is less than the upper limit number (for example, four), and obtains the random number per normal symbol if the upper limit number is not reached. Do. Further, the main control CPU 72 normally increments the number of symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 22).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the first special symbol storage update process (step S12 in FIG. 29). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol storage update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operating memory number counter to check whether the operating memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of groups) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used by the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section is a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol The random numbers can be stored in sets one by one. At this time, if the value of the operation memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 29). On the other hand, if the value of the operation memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one to the first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. The lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled based on the value of the counter added here.

  Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number circuit 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The acquisition of the random number value is performed by specifying the pin address of the random number circuit 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the designation of the address is performed twice in one byte each in the high order and low order. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves the same as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol in the transfer destination address.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by specifying the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves the value as the jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol in the transfer destination address.

  Step S34: Also, the main control CPU 72 acquires reach determination random numbers and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers in order from the random number counter area for fluctuation of the RAM 76 as random number values related to the fluctuation conditions of the first special symbol (acquisition of fluctuation pattern determination elements means). Similarly, acquisition of these random number values is performed by specifying the address of the variable random number counter area. Then, when the reach control random number and the variation pattern determination random number are respectively acquired from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are free sections in the area. To store in a set (storage means, lottery element storage means). The order (for example, the first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at the current stage, the random numbers are stored sequentially from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored sequentially from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in the FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (gaming state) is in the middle of a big hit. If the jackpot is not medium (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the subsequent steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of prefetching is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

  Step S37: If not being a big hit (Step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition effect determination process for the first special symbol. This processing determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively, and thereby the effect contents It is for judging (so-called "pre-reading"). The specific contents of the process will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: When returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, next, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special drawing destination determination effect command regarding the first special symbol. The upper byte data describes that the command type is "for special drawing destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". The lower byte portion of the special drawing destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), so here, for example, a 1-word-long command by combining the upper byte with the lower byte Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect memory number increase effect command for the first special symbol. Specifically, for the leading value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte representing the type of command, the 1-word length is obtained by adding the number of working storages after increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte Generate a rendering command. At this time, for the lower byte, the second digit is set to “0” by default, which indicates that the value is “the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working storages”. That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it indicates that the number of current working memories becomes "01H" as a result of increasing one from the last working memory number "00H". Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", the number of working memories at this time is "02H" to "02H" as a result of being increased by one each from the previous working memory numbers "01H" to "03H" It shows that it became "04H". In addition, said leading value "BBH" is a value showing that this presentation command is the operation memory number command about the 1st special symbol.

  Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. In this process, the special drawing destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the effect memory number increase effect effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command are transmitted to the effect control device 124. Storage number notification means).

  If the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 29).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol storage update process (step S16 in FIG. 29). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory updating process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operating memory number counter to check whether the operating memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operating memory number counter represents the number (group number) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter has reached the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 29). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU72 proceeds to the next step S41 and subsequent steps.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one to the second special symbol operation memory number (increment the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). As in the previous step S31 (FIG. 30), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled based on the value of the counter added here.

  Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number circuit 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random value is the same as step S32 (FIG. 30) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method of acquiring the random value is the same as step S33 (FIG. 30) described above.

  Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 acquires reach determination random numbers and fluctuation pattern determination random numbers regarding fluctuation conditions of the second special symbol in order from the fluctuation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (fluctuation pattern determination element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 30) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach determination random number, and the variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers are free sections in the area. To store in sets (storage means). The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 30) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (gaming state) is in the middle of a big hit. And if it is other than a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the subsequent steps S46 and S47. On the other hand, if the player is in the middle of a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that no effect is produced by the pre-reading for the ball entering during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than during a big hit (Step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This processing determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44 respectively, and thereby the effect contents It is for judging. The specific content of the process will be described later.

  Step S47: When returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, next, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, "B9H") of the special drawing destination determination effect command. The upper byte data describes that the command type is “for special drawing destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte portion of the special drawing destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition time effect determination process (step S46), here, for example, one word is obtained by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect memory number increase effect command for the second special symbol. Here, an effect command of 1 word length obtained by adding, to the lower byte, the operation storage number (for example, “01H” to “04H”) after the increase with respect to the leading value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper byte indicating the type of command Generate Similarly for the second special symbol, by defaulting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to represent that the value is "the result (change information) due to an increase in the number of working memories". it can. In addition, precedence value "BCH" is a value showing that the present production command is an operation memory number command about the 2nd special symbol.

  Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes effect command output setting processing for the second special symbol. In this manner, preparation is made to transmit the special drawing destination determination effect command, the operation memory number increase effect command, the start opening winning sound control command, etc. to the effect control device 124 regarding the second special symbol (stored number notification means) . Further, when the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 29).

[Determination process at acquisition]
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect determination process at acquisition time. The main control CPU 72 executes this effect determination process at the time of acquisition in the first first special symbol storage update processing and the second special symbol storage update processing (step S37 in FIG. 30, step S46 in FIG. 31) (first determination Execution means, prefetch processing execution means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when entering the middle starting winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when entering the variable starting winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to processing relating to the first special symbol and to processing relating to the second special symbol. The contents of the process will be described below along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte portion (for example, "00H") of the special drawing destination determination effect command (destination determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of disconnection).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot decision random number as the first judgment random number value. The random numbers to be loaded here are stored in the RAM 76 in the first first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 30) or the second special symbol storage update process (step S45 in FIG. 31). .

  Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determining means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random value from the comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is set in accordance with the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1 (the winning probability according to the set value). Next, the main control CPU 72 determines, for example, from the value of the flag register whether the operation result is 0 or a positive value. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the hit value range (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an out-of-time variation pattern information predetermination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly at the time of operation of the “time shortening function” is reflected in the variation pattern destination determination command generated here. For example, if the current state is at the time of operation of "time reduction function", the main control CPU 72 corresponds to "outgoing reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)" based on the reach determination random number loaded. Determine if there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to "a loss reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to "time reduction". In the case of reach variation, "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from reach mode random numbers, and a variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "outreach reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to "time reduction". Alternatively, if the current state is the non-operation time (low probability state) of the "time reduction function", the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out of reach reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number It is determined whether or not As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the “normal shift reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “normal shift reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normal deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern in the small hit, as in the case of the process in the above-described disconnection.

  When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 executes the determination result management process of step S82 and then ends the acquisition effect determination process at the time of acquisition, and the first special symbol storage update process of the caller (FIG. 29) or the second special symbol It returns to the memory update process (FIG. 30). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S54 that the loaded random number is not out of the hit value range but within the hit value range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag according to the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag according to the first determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although no change has been started yet. Specifically, when there is a winning value in the big hit determination random number stored so far, if the big hit symbol random number to be paired with this corresponds to "one of the probability variation symbols", the probability state will be scheduled For example, "A0H" is set in the flag. This value represents a flag value to be set to be in a high probability state in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit decision random number acquired after the big hit decision random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the big hit determination random number stored so far, and the big hit symbol random number to be paired with this corresponds to "any normal symbol", the probability state will be scheduled For example, "01H" is set in the flag. This value represents a flag value to be set to be in a normal (low) probability state in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit decision random number acquired later than the big hit decision random number. The flag value is reset (00H) if the winning value does not yet exist in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far. Also, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored, for example, in the flag area of the RAM 76. Here, an example in which the "predicted state of probability state flag" is used to strictly determine the prior collision determination is given. However, in the case of simply performing the previous state of collision determination based on the current probability state, step S56 and subsequent steps Step S58, Step S60, Step S62, Step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66 next.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 next sets the low probability (normal) comparison value in the A register. The low probability comparison value is also set in accordance with the low probability winning probability (the winning probability according to the set value) in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the "current probability state flag". The probability state flag indicates whether the current internal state is a high probability (during a definite change) or not, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (during a definite change), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the probability is low (normally medium), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H” ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the loaded special symbol probability state flag does not represent high probability (≠ 01 H), and as a result, if it indicates high probability (No ), And then execute step S64.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a high probability comparison value. As a result, the low probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is set according to the winning probability (high probability according to the set value) of the pachinko machine 1 at the high probability.

  As described above, in the case where the probability state schedule flag according to the first determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability, and the next step S72 is performed. Will do. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the present probability state flag does not represent the high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the range of the hit value (lottery result destination determining means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines whether the operation result is a negative value (<0) or not from the value of the flag register, and as a result, if the loaded random number is out of the hit value range (Yes The main control CPU 72 executes the above-mentioned disconnection time change pattern information prior determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not out of the range of hit values but within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes jackpot symbol type determination processing. This process is for determining the type of big hit (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number which is paired with the big hit determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers by symbol stored in the first special symbol storage update process (step S35 in FIG. 30) or the second special symbol storage update process (step S45 in FIG. 31). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in the above-described step S54, and it is determined from the result as to the "certain symbol" or the "normal symbol" as the big hit type. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as the special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag according to the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol end determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents "a normal symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "01H" in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value indicates “probable symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the processing after the next time, it is determined in step S56 that "flag is set".

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special drawing destination determination effect command. For example, "01H" is set when the special symbol destination determination value corresponds to "a normal symbol", and "A0H" is set when it corresponds to a "probable variation symbol". In any case, by setting the lower byte data, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot variation pattern information prior determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. For example, prior determination information on the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit is reflected in the variation pattern destination determination command generated here. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before (previous internal hit) the probability state schedule flag according to the previous determination result is set. On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, in the case where the prior collision determination is performed only on the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following steps S56, S58, S60, S62, and S76.

  Step S56: If the main control CPU 72 confirms that the probability state schedule flag has already been set (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets the low probability (normal) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a "probability state scheduled flag". The probability state schedule flag is for setting the probability state in advance in the subsequent judgment based on the preceding judgment result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding judgment result is to shift to high probability (probability), as described above, “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag, and conversely, the immediately preceding judgment result If the probability state based on is going to return to low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high probability schedule (≠ 01 H), and as a result, if it represents a high probability schedule ( No) Next, step S64 is executed to set a high probability comparison value.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag according to the first determination result is already set and the value is scheduled to have a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and the subsequent step S72 or later is performed. Will do. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent the schedule of the high probability but represents the schedule of the normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the step The step S64 is skipped and the subsequent steps S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thereby, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the big hit judgment in advance, taking into consideration the subsequent change of the internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the first determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol storage update process (FIG. 30) or the second special symbol storage update process (FIG. 31).

[Special game management processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of special game management processing.
Special game management processing is execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000), special symbol variation processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), big hit variable winning prize device The configuration includes a subroutine (program module) group of the management process (step S5000) and the small hitting variable winning device management process (step S6000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special game management process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be performed next (any one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special game management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

  Which process to select as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress status of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started variable display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the processing has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display processing (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the address of the jump destination is specified in the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, the “process flag”, the “process selection flag”, etc. are used separately from such a selection method. There are also known programming examples in which the CPU chooses what to do next. In such a programming example, the CPU calls each processing as it goes through and makes conditional branching (continuation / return) with reference to the flags one by one at its first step. However, in the selection method of this embodiment, the main control There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: During special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, a drive signal (1 byte data) of ON or OFF is generated for each segment and dot (numbers 0 to 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, although a drive signal of ON or OFF is generated for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby stop display of the special symbol is performed.

  Step S5000: The big hit variable winning prize device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode in the above-mentioned special symbol stop display processing. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, an opportunity to shift to the big hit gaming state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) from the normal state until then occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set to the big hit variable winning device management processing in the previous execution selection processing (step S1000), the variation display of the special symbol is not performed. In the jackpot variable winning device management process, until the first large winning opening solenoid 90 or the second large winning opening solenoid 97 for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or until 10 balls are counted) And the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric symbol). . During this time, the game balls are concentrated on the first variable prize device 30 and the second variable prize device 31 intensively, whereby the player is given the opportunity to obtain many prize balls collectively (special game (special game). Execution means). The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit is referred to as "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 15 times in total, they are referred to as "15 round". It may be called generically.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (the number of rounds, the number of opening and closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big hit variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round. Alternatively, each time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is ended, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with an initial value of 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The number-of-rounds command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process (step S 144 in FIG. 16). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (major) in that round.

  Then, when the big hit game is ended, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (high probability state, time shortened state) after the end of the big hit game based on the game state flag (probability fluctuation function operating flag, time shortening function operating flag) High probability time shortening state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). In the "high probability state", the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery is, for example, about 10 times higher than usual (specific gaming state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). In the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, and as described above, the operation lottery of the normal symbol becomes high probability, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the open time of the variable start winning device 28 Is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). The “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be shifted to only one of them in control or may be shifted to both of them.

  Step S6000: The small hitting variable winning prize device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hitting mode in the above-mentioned special symbol stop display processing. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small hit, an opportunity to shift to the small hit gaming state from the normal state until then occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set to the small hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variation display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes for a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), most winnings to the first large winning opening occur do not do.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for example, the following winning types are provided as the plurality of winning types.
(1) "11 round probability variation big hit 1-11"
(2) "15 round probability variation big hit 1-6"
(3) "8 round probability variation big hit"
(4) "Six rounds odd variation big hit"
(5) "11 rounds usually a big hit"
(6) "Three rounds odd variation big hit"
(7) "5 round probability variation big hit"
(8) "5 rounds usually a big hit"

  The above-mentioned winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is displayed stopped when winning. For example, "11 round probability variation big hit 1-11" corresponds to a big hit of "11 round probability variation 1-11", "11 round normal big hit" corresponds to a big hit of "11 round normal symbol". Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[11 round probability variation 1-11]
In the special symbol stop display processing described above, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11”, a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the opening of the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is performed one by one, and this continues until the eleventh round. When it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbol 1-11", it shifts to "high probability time shortening state" by activating "probability changing function" and "time shortening function" after the end of the big hit game.

  Here, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the longest opening time, when a prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) have occurred in one round. Be done. Also, similarly, when a prescribed number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 gaming balls) occur in one round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 does not wait for the longest opening time to elapse. It is closed.

[15 round probability variation 1 to 7]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "15 round probability variation symbols 1 to 7", a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the opening of the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 or the opening of the second large winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is performed one by one, and this continues until the fifteenth round. When it corresponds to "15 round probability variation 1-7", it shifts to the "high probability time shortening state" by activating the "probability changing function" and the "time shortening function" after the end of the big hit game.

[8 round probability variation pattern]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "eight round probability variation symbol", a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the opening of the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is performed one by one, and this continues until the eighth round. When it corresponds to "8 round probability variation symbol", it shifts to "high probability time shortening state" by activating "probability fluctuation function" and "time shortening function" after the end of the big hit game.

[6 round probability variation pattern]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “six round odd symbol”, a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the opening of the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is performed one by one, and this continues until the sixth round. When it corresponds to "6 round probability variation symbol", it shifts to "high probability time shortening state" by activating "probability change function" and "time shortening function" after the end of the big hit game.

[11 round normal pattern]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stop displayed in the form of “11 round normal symbols”, a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the opening of the first large winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is performed one by one, and this continues until the eleventh round. When it corresponds to "11 round normal", it shifts to the "low probability time shortening state" by activating the "time shortening function" after the end of the big hit game.

[3 round probability variation pattern]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “three round probability variation symbol”, a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is performed one by one, and this continues until the third round. When it corresponds to "3 round probability variation symbol", it shifts to "high probability time shortening state" by activating "probability change function" and "time shortening function" after the end of the big hit game.

[5 round probability variation pattern]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “five round probability variation symbol”, a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is performed one by one, and this continues until the fifth round. When it corresponds to "5 round probability variation symbol", it shifts to "high probability time shortening state" by activating "probability fluctuation function" and "time shortening function" after the end of the big hit game.

[5 round normal pattern]
In the above special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbol is stop displayed in the form of “five round normal symbol”, a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is performed one by one, and this continues until the fifth round. When it corresponds to "5 round normal", it shifts to "low probability time shortening state" by activating "time shortening function" after the end of the big hit game.

  In any case, when the winning symbol corresponds to any of the "probable symbols", a bonus is given to the player to shift the internal state to the "high probability time shortening state" after the big hit game is over. On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to any of the "normal symbols", the internal state shifts to the "short probability time shortening state" after the big hit game is over.

  The opening time, the interval time between rounds, and the ending time during the big hit game are respectively “5.0 seconds”, “1.5 seconds”, and “7.0 seconds”. The opening time is the waiting time from the start of the big hit game to the opening of the big winning opening, and the inter-round interval time is the waiting time set between the rounds, ending The time is a waiting time set after the final round of the big hit game is over.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When the small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes (special game execution means). That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode during the previous special symbol stop display processing, the small hit game in the normal probability state or the high probability state (the first variable winning device 30 is operated Game is executed. In such a small hit game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), the winning of the first large winning opening hardly occurs. In addition, even if the small hit game is over, the "probability change function" does not operate, and the "time reduction function" does not operate, so it shifts to the "high probability state" or "time reduction state" Benefits are not granted (not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win the small hit in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" will not end after the small hit game is finished, and even if you win the small hit in the "time reduction state", the small After the end of the hit game, "time saving state" never ends (except when the upper limit number is reached). In addition, in this embodiment, although it is set as the game specification which sets a small hit, it can also be set as the game specification which does not set a small hit.

[Special symbol change pretreatment]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation pre-processing. Each step will be described below.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is larger than 0). This confirmation can be performed with reference to the value of the operation memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. If the number of operation memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demonstration setting process of step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this processing, the main control CPU 72 generates a command for demonstration effect. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 16). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. At the time of recovery, the end address is recovered as described above (the same applies to the following).

  On the other hand, if the value of the operation memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes special symbol storage area shift processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads one of the random numbers for lottery (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, whichever corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 sequentially reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers from the top section, and moves the remaining random numbers to the previous section one by one (shift ). The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. Note that the program may be a program in which random numbers are read out in the order simply stored without providing such a priority order by special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one from the value of the operation memory number counter (one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which has been shifted the random number) stored in the RAM 76 and subtracts it. The later value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". Thereby, the display mode of the memory number by the 1st special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the 2nd special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (1 decrease). When the procedure up to this point is completed, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the range of the jackpot value, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution means). The range of the big hit value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (during probability fluctuation function operation), and in the high probability state, the range of the big hit value is expanded about 10 times than the normal probability state. Ru. Then, if the random number value read out at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400. Here, the range of the big hit value is set according to the set value. For this reason, the range of the big hit value becomes wide in the high setting than the low setting.

  If the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination processing, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (lottery execution) means). The "small hit" referred to here is something other than the non-election (loss), but is different from the "big hit". That is, although "big hit" generates an opportunity (governing point of the game) to shift to the above "high probability state" or "time shortening state", "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "small hit" is positioned as a condition that operates the first variable winning device 30 as in the "big hit". The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different or the same between the normal probability state and the high probability state (during probability fluctuation function operation). In any case, if the read random number is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and the process proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance as a hit range other than the non-winning, according to the program. It is also possible to write each in the ROM 74, read it out, and make a big hit judgment while comparing it with a random number value. When setting a small difference in the winning probability of the small hit, the range of the small hit value is set according to the set value. For this reason, the range of the small hit value is wider in the high setting than in the low setting.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set in the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination processing. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, set 01H) or the small hit (for example, set 0AH) according to the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes stop symbol determination processing upon release. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of release by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of removal) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 16).

  In addition, in this embodiment, since 7 segment LED is used for the 1st special symbol display 34 and the 2nd special symbol display 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of detachment is always one segment (the center) It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H), leaving only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used on the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes out-of-time variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines a variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for a special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol or corresponds to the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of departure differs depending on whether or not the above-mentioned "time reduction state", in this processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is "time reduction state". Check if there is. In the case of the "time reduction state", the fluctuation time at the time of losing is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) except for basically performing the reach fluctuation (a shortening time fluctuation determining means ). Moreover, even if it is not a "time reduction state", the fluctuation time at the time of losing is set based on "the number of operation display memory at the time of fluctuation display start (0 to 3)" set at step S2200 except when the reach fluctuation is performed. The number may be shortened (for example, 0 at the start of variable display operation → about 12.5 seconds, 1 at the start of variable display operation → about 8 seconds, 2 at the start of variable display operation → 5 About 2 seconds, at the start of fluctuation display 3 working memory number → about 2.5 seconds). In addition, the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of removal) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer. In addition, the information regarding the fluctuation pattern of the selected special symbol is transmitted to a presentation control apparatus as a fluctuation pattern command (the same also at the time of winning).

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery falls under the non-winning condition, for example, “reach effect” is generated on the effect and the control is performed without causing the “reach effect”. And Then, in the “time variation pattern selection table for losing”, a variation pattern corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect” is defined in advance, and when it corresponds to non-winning, One of the variation patterns is to be selected. In addition, the reach effect includes various reach effects such as normal reach effect, long reach effect, super reach effect and the like.

[Example of out-of-time variation pattern selection table]
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the out-of-time variation pattern selection table (low probability / high probability non-time shortening state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of low probability or high probability non-time shortening state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern specifying means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. For "comparison value", for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "221", "231", "241", "251", "255 (FFH)" The "variation pattern number""1" to "8" are assigned to each "comparison value".

  The fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out without reach effect, and the fluctuation pattern numbers “6” and “7” are the fluctuation patterns that become out of reach after reaching Correspondingly, the variation pattern number “8” corresponds to the variation pattern that is lost after super reach. The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents in accordance with the number of operation start storages (the same applies hereinafter).

  Here, in the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern, the length of the set variation time is significantly different. That is, while the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds according to the number of stored memories), the "reach fluctuation pattern" is It corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to about 150 seconds) or more twice that time.

  Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the comparison value is used. The corresponding variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, assuming that the variation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value with the first comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 201 and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of the out-of-time variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state).
This selection table is a table (variation pattern specifying means) used at the time of losing in the low probability time shortening state (when it corresponds to not winning). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. For "comparison value", for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "221", "231", "241", "251", "255 (FFH)" It is provided, and the "variation pattern number" of "21" to "28" is assigned to each "comparison value".

  The fluctuation pattern numbers “21” to “25” correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out without reach effect, and the fluctuation pattern numbers “26” to “28” are the fluctuation patterns that are out after reaching. It corresponds. However, since fluctuation pattern numbers “21” to “25” are non-reach fluctuation due to time shortening fluctuation, fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) shortened as fluctuation time of normal state is set .

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above variation pattern selection table, and corresponds to the comparison value if the random number is less than or equal to the comparison value. The variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, assuming that the variation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value with the first comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 201 and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of the out-of-time variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state).
This selection table is a table (variation pattern specifying means) used at the time of losing in the high probability time shortening state (when it corresponds to not winning). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. For "comparison value", for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "221", "231", "241", "251", "255 (FFH)" The "variation pattern number""41" to "48" are assigned to each "comparison value".

  The variation pattern numbers “41” to “45” correspond to the variation patterns that are out without reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “46” to “48” are the variation patterns that become off after reaching. It corresponds. However, fluctuation pattern numbers “41” to “45” are extremely shortened fluctuation time (for example, about 0.5 seconds) as fluctuation time of normal state in order to realize high-speed fluctuation in high probability time shortened state Is set.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above variation pattern selection table, and corresponds to the comparison value if the random number is less than or equal to the comparison value. The variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, assuming that the variation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value with the first comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 201 and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "42" as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of the out-of-time variation pattern selection table (special section).
The selection table is a table used when the high probability time shortening state or the low probability time shortening state special section is not winning (variation pattern specifying means). In addition, a special section is a section to shift after the big hit game end when it corresponds to "11 round probability strange symbol 1-11" or "11 round normal symbol", and the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is 1 or more It is a section to shift to

  Here, in order to realize the treasure challenge effect to be described later, the variation patterns at the time of removal in the special section of the high probability time shortening state or the low probability time shortening state are all the same variation patterns (the variation time is about 20 seconds, for example) Is set, and this selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined variation pattern (non-reach special variation pattern 50).

  Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “50” as the fluctuation pattern number regardless of which value the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random value is. The non-reach special variation pattern 50 is a special variation pattern in which the variation time is fixed, and the variation time is not shortened by the number of memories.

[See Figure 34: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are the control procedures when the big hit determination result is out (other than non-winning), but the determination result is big hit (step S2400: Yes) or small hit (step S2402: Yes) The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of the big hit will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes jackpot stop symbol determination processing (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the current winning symbol (big hit stop symbol number) according to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is previously defined in the special symbol determination data table (winning type specifying means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the big hit stop symbol selection table in the big hit stop symbol determination process, and can determine the type of the winning symbol from the stored contents based on the big hit symbol random number.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, as a winning symbol to be selected at the time of big hit, "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11", "15 round probability variation symbols 1 to 6", "8 round probability variation symbols", "6 round probability variation symbols", "11 round Regular symbols ", 3 round odd symbols", "5 round odd symbols", "5 round regular symbols" are available. Each winning symbol may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "11 round probability variation symbol 1", "11 round probability variation symbol 1a", "11 round probability variation symbol 1b", "11 round probability variation symbol 1c", and so on.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbols to be selected depending on whether the result of the current big hit corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 39 is a view showing a configuration example of a first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type specifying means).

  In the first special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table, the distribution value according to the winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value "2", "3", "31", "1", " 10 "," 2 "and" 35 "correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 100. In the second column from the left, "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11", "15 round probability variation symbols 1", "8 round probability variation symbols", "6 round probability variation symbols" corresponding to each distribution value, "11 round regular symbols" are shown. That is, at the time of big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio that "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 9" is selected is 2/100 (= 2%) respectively, and "11 round probability variation 10" is selected Rate is 3/100 (= 3%), and the rate at which “11 round odd symbol 11” is selected is 31/100 (= 31%), “15 round odd symbol 1” is selected Rate is 1/100 (= 1%), and the rate at which “8 round probability symbol” is selected is 10/100 (= 10%), and the rate at which “6 round probability variation” is selected Is two hundredths (= 2%), and the ratio at which “11 round regular symbols” are selected is 35 hundredths (= 35%). The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

  Here, "the substance" in the figure means the number of round games that are long opened in a big hit game that includes a round game in which the big winning opening is short-opened and a round game in which the big winning opening is long-opening Is shown. The round game may be executed using the first large winning opening, or may be performed using the second large winning opening. Further, "next time" in the figure means that "10,000 times" is set as the number of probability variations. Note that the jackpot in which the number of rounds matches the actual number indicates that there is no short game open round game (only long round game open).

  In any case, when the result of the current big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table Select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described, for example, by a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte is that the winning symbol of this time is selected at the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents Further, EVENT values “01H” to “0FH” of the lower byte represent the types of corresponding winning symbols in the selection table. Therefore, for example, when the result of the current big hit corresponds to the first special symbol and "11 round probability variation symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H" It will be

  As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

  In the three columns on the right side of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, values of the number of probability variations, the number of time reductions, and the number of special variations given after the end of the big hit game are shown.

[Number of definite variations]
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to any of the probability variation symbols, the number of probability variations is given 10000 times (certain variation next time). On the other hand, when it corresponds to any of the normal symbols, the number of definite variations is not given.

[Time savings]
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 10", "15 round probability variation symbols 1", "8 round probability variation symbols", and "6 round probability variation symbols", the number of time reductions is given 10000 times ( Next time) Moreover, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbol 11", the number of time saving is given 10 times. In this case, when the probability change (high probability time reduction state) ends for 10 variations, the state shifts to the latent probability change state (high probability non-time reduction state). In addition, when it corresponds to “11 round probability variation symbol 11” in the latent probability variation state, the number of time saving may be given 10000 times (so-called no latency continuation). Furthermore, when it corresponds to "11 round normal symbols", time saving number of times is given 10 times. In this case, when the time shortening of 10 fluctuations (the low probability time shortening state) ends, the state shifts to the normal state (the low probability non-time shortening state).

[Number of special changes]
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11" and "11 round normal symbols", the number of special variation is set. Specifically, "one time" is set as the number of special variation when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation 1", and "2 times" as the number of special variation when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation 2" Is set, and such setting continues to “11 round odd symbol 10”, “10 times” as the number of special changes when “11 round positive symbol 11” or “11 round normal symbol” is applicable. It is set. In addition, when it corresponds to "15 round probability variation 1", "8 round probability variation", and "6 round probability variation", the number of special changes is not set.

[Second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type specifying means).

  Also in the second special symbol big hit time stop symbol selection table, the distribution value according to the winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each distribution value “33”, “4”, “3”, “6” , “8”, “3”, “5”, and “35” correspond to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, "15 round odd symbol 2 to 7", "3 round positive symbol," "5 round positive symbol," and "5 round regular symbol" corresponding to the sorting value are shown. ing. That is, at the time of big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio for selecting “15 round probability symbol 2” is 33/100 (= 33%), and “15 round probability symbol 4, 5” is selected The ratio to be made is three hundredths (= 3%) respectively, and the ratio at which “15 round probability symbol 6” is selected is six hundredths (= 6%), “15 round probability symbol 7” is The ratio to be selected is eight hundredths (= 8%), the ratio at which "three rounds odd symbol" is selected is three hundredths (= 3%), "five rounds odd symbol" is selected Rate is 5/100 (= 5%), and the rate at which the "5 round regular symbol" is selected is 35/100 (= 35%).

  If the result of the current big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU72 performs the selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, as shown in the third column from the left in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning. Here too, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above-mentioned MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol It represents that it is. Further, EVENT values “01H” to “09H” of the lower byte represent the types of the corresponding winning symbols in the selection table. Therefore, for example, when the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and "15 round probability variation symbol 2" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command is described by "B2H01H". Become.

  As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

  In the three columns on the right side of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the values of the number of probability variations, the number of time reductions, and the number of special variations given after the end of the big hit game are shown.

[Number of definite variations]
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to any of the probability variation symbols, the number of probability variations is given 10000 times (certain variation next time). On the other hand, when it corresponds to any of the normal symbols, the number of definite variations is not given.

[Time savings]
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to "15 round probability variation symbols 2 to 7", "3 round probability variation symbols", and "5 round probability variation symbols", the time reduction number is given 10000 times (certain variation next time). On the other hand, when it corresponds to "5 round normal symbols", the number of time saving is given 100 times (100 times saving). In this case, when the time reduction of 100 fluctuations (the low probability time shortening state) ends, the state shifts to the normal state (the low probability non-time shortening state).

[Number of special changes]
In the present embodiment, in the case of winning with the second special symbol, the number of special variations is not set.

[See Figure 34: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the case of a big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than the time of departure is generally determined.

  In the present embodiment, if the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit, control is performed such that, for example, “reach effect” is generated on the effect to be a big hit. And in the "big hit variation pattern selection table", a variation pattern corresponding to a plurality of types of "reach effects" is defined, and when it is a big hit, any variation pattern is selected from among them It will be. In addition, the reach effect includes various reach effects such as normal reach effect, long reach effect, super reach effect and the like. Basically, super reach production has longer fluctuation time and higher expectation for winning than reach production such as normal reach production and long reach production. In addition, when winning with the time shortening function activated, even if a fluctuation pattern with a short fluctuation time (a fluctuation pattern without reach effect) is selected without selecting a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time. Good.

[Example of big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability / high probability non-time shortening state).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the low probability or high probability non-time shortening state (variation pattern specifying means). In the present embodiment, the variation patterns are not distinguished according to the type (win symbol) of the big hit, but a dedicated variation pattern selection table may be used for each big hit (the same applies hereinafter). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. For "comparison value", for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "221", "231", "241", "251", "255 (FFH)" It is provided, and the "variation pattern number""61" to "68" is assigned to each "comparison value".

  The variation pattern numbers “61” to “66” correspond to the variation patterns that are hit by the super reach effect and the variation pattern numbers “67” and “68” are the reach effects (other than the super reach effect It corresponds to the fluctuation pattern which becomes a hit when the reach effect is performed.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above variation pattern selection table, and corresponds to the comparison value if the random number is less than or equal to the comparison value. The variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, assuming that the variation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value with the first comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 201 and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern selection table (low probability time shortening state).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the low probability time shortening state (variation pattern specifying means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. For "comparison value", for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "221", "231", "241", "251", "255 (FFH)" It is provided, and the "variation pattern number" of "81" to "88" is assigned to each "comparison value".

  The variation pattern numbers “81” to “88” correspond to the variation patterns that are the reach effect and hit.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above variation pattern selection table, and corresponds to the comparison value if the random number is less than or equal to the comparison value. The variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, assuming that the variation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value with the first comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 201 and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern selection table (high probability time shortening state).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the high probability time reduction state (variation pattern specifying means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are set and stored one byte at a time, respectively, from the top address. For "comparison value", for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "221", "231", "241", "251", "255 (FFH)" The "variation pattern numbers""101" to "108" are assigned to the respective "comparison values".

  The variation pattern numbers “101” to “108” correspond to the variation patterns that are the reach effect and hit. At the time of winning in the high probability time shortening state, it may be possible to set a fluctuation pattern which is a hit without performing the reach effect.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the above variation pattern selection table, and corresponds to the comparison value if the random number is less than or equal to the comparison value. The variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, assuming that the variation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 compares the next comparison value with the first comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value. 201 and the random number value. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the corresponding fluctuation pattern number.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern selection table (special section).
This selection table is a table used when a high probability time shortening state or a low probability time shortening state special section and corresponds to a big hit (variation pattern specifying means).

  Here, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit in the special section of high probability time shortening state or low probability time shortening state is the same fluctuation pattern (all the same fluctuation pattern ( The fluctuation time is set to, for example, about 30 seconds, and this selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation pattern 170 per non-reach).

  Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects “170” as the fluctuation pattern number regardless of which value the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random value is. The non-reach special fluctuation pattern 170 is a special fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is fixed, and the fluctuation time is not shortened by the number of memories.

[See Figure 34: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the value of the probability variation function operation flag as a game state flag when the type of the winning symbol (big hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S 2410 is “any probability symbol”. 01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state transition means, probability variation function operation means). The main control CPU 72 also resets the value of the probability variation function operation flag as the game state flag when the type of the winning symbol determined in the previous step S 2410 is “any normal symbol” (low probability state setting means Low probability state transition means, probability state setting means).

  In addition, the main control CPU72, even if the winning symbol type (big hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is "any winning symbol", the main control CPU72 as a game state flag time reduction function operation flag Value (01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time shortening state transition means, time shortening function operation means).

  Further, in the process of step S 2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of big hit) together with the above-mentioned stop symbol command (at the time of big hit). The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

Next, the small hit process will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes small hit time stop symbol determination processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type (small hit time stop symbol number) of the winning symbol at the small hit based on the big hit symbol random number. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the small hit is previously defined in the small hit special symbol selection table (win type specifying means). In the present embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol for the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated dedicated random number may be used.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is only one kind of "twice open small hit symbol". However, in addition to this, for example, other types such as “once-open small hit symbol” and “three-open small hit symbol” may be prepared. As mentioned above, the "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery does not become a trigger for the state after it to change to the "high probability state" or the "time shortening state", so this type of pachinko machine is essential " A "one open small hit design" can be provided without being bound by the provision of two rounds (open twice) or more.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes small hitting variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, it is possible to select the reach fluctuation pattern in the case of a small hit, or to select a fluctuation pattern equal to the time of the out-of-normal fluctuation.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes small hit and other setting processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The stop symbol command and the lottery result command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the variation pattern data based on the variation pattern number (at the time of failure / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a variation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The fluctuation start command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special game management process.

[FIG. 33: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol variation processing, as described above, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the variation timer from the register to the timer counter, and thereafter, the timer counter according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value) Decrement the value of Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variation display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination processing (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 34). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process. In the special symbol stop display processing, when the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time, the main control CPU 72 deletes the flag during flag variation.

[Time-of-day variation pattern determination processing]
FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing an example of procedure of out-of-time variation pattern determination processing. Each step will be described below.

  Step S2600: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76, and checks whether the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0”. The “variation pattern selection counter value” is a counter value managed by the main control CPU 72, and is a variable to be referred to when executing the special variation. Note that the variation pattern selection counter value is set in the special variation count setting process (FIG. 55) described later.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2606. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is not larger than "0", that is, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is "0" (No), the main control The CPU 72 executes step S2602.

  The case where the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than "0" means that a special variation is performed, and the case where the variation pattern selection counter value is "0" is a special variation. It means not to run.

  Step S2602: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. The internal state can be confirmed by the probability variation function operation flag and the time shortening function operation flag (the same applies hereinafter).

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2608. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2604.

  Step S2604: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2610. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the internal state is the low probability time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2612.

Step S2606: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a variation pattern with reference to the special section of the out-of-time variation pattern selection table (FIG. 38).
Step S2608: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a fluctuation pattern with reference to the loss time fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 37) for the high probability time shortening state.

Step S2610: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a fluctuation pattern with reference to the loss time fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 36) for the low probability time shortening state.
Step S2612: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a variation pattern with reference to the out-of-time variation pattern selection table (FIG. 35) for the non-time shortened state (low probability / high probability non-time shortened state).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 34).

[Big hit time fluctuation pattern decision processing]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart of an example of a procedure of jackpot variation pattern determination processing. Each step will be described below.

  Step S2710: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76, and checks whether the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2716. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is not larger than "0", that is, when it is confirmed that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is "0" (No), the main control The CPU 72 executes step S2712.

  Step S2712: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2718. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the internal state is the high probability time reduction state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2714.

  Step S2714: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2720. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the internal state is the low probability time shortening state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2722.

Step S2716: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a variation pattern with reference to the big hit variation pattern selection table (FIG. 44) for the special section.
Step S2718: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a fluctuation pattern with reference to the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 43) for the high probability time shortening state.

Step S2720: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a fluctuation pattern with reference to the jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table (FIG. 42) for the low probability time shortening state.
Step S2720: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of determining a variation pattern with reference to the big hit variation pattern selection table (FIG. 41) for the non-time shortened state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 34).

[Special symbol storage area shift process]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of special symbol storage area shift processing. If the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than “0” in the previous special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2100 in FIG. 34: Yes), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Each step will be described below.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the operation memory corresponding to the second special symbol remains. This confirmation can be performed with reference to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. If the value of the operation memory number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 1 or more (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as a target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the operation memory number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 0 (step S2210: No), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted the storage area Do. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as a target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the special symbol of the target designated in either step S2212 or step S2214 above. In addition, about the content of a specific process, it is as having already stated in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation storage counter for the special symbol of interest. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (−1) the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S 2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the change start operation memory number” from the value of the operation memory counter after subtraction. Here, the value of the operation memory counter may be added to both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and then the “number of operation memories at start of fluctuation” may be set.

Step S2222: In addition, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the present memory area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a command of 1 word length, but the configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect memory number increase effect command". That is, the effect memory number reduction effect command has a lower byte value (for example, "00H" to "03H" for indicating the number of action memories after reduction with respect to the leading value (for example, "BCH") for the upper byte indicating the command type. “), And the value of the lower byte is obtained by further adding (ORing) an addition value (eg,“ 10H ”) which means“ a decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption ”. Therefore, for the low-order byte, the second digit is "1" by ORing the addition value "10H", and this value indicates that "result (change information) due to decrease in the number of working memories" It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", the number of working memories "4" (command notation "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and the current working memory number is "3" (command The notation shows that it became "13H". Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", the result is that the working memory numbers "3" to "1" (command notation "13H" to "11H") until the previous time decrease by one respectively The present operating memory number indicates that "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). In addition, said leading value "BCH" is a value showing that this presentation command is an operation memory number command about the 2nd special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the effect memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the leading value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that the preceding value is an operation memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This processing is for transmitting to the effect control device 124 the operation memory number reduction effect command set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 34).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of processing during special symbol stop display. Each step will be described below.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrement by the interrupt cycle).

  Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended yet (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 33) also in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the flag during the symbol fluctuation here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the big hit flag is set. If the value (01H) of the jackpot flag is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to the “big hit variable winning device management process”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing to set various functions inoperative in this processing. Specifically, the probability fluctuation function is deactivated and the time shortening function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (overall role) is started, the low probability non-time shortening state is transitioned.

  Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “big bonus start (big hit game in progress)” as an internal state flag in control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the big hit symbol. For example, if the type of the big hit is "15 round big hit", the value corresponding to "15 rounds" is set in the continuous operation number status. Also, if the type of the big hit is "3 round big hit", the value indicating the "3 rounds" is set in the continuous operation number status. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command representing a big hit. A state command representing a big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

  Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type (stop symbol number) of the big hit symbol determined in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 34). For example, if the type of jackpot is "15 rounds jackpot", the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing "15 rounds". Also, when the jackpot type is "3 rounds jackpot", the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing "3 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the jackpot, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, in the case other than the big hit time, the following procedure is executed.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines that the value (01H) of the big hit flag is not set in step S4300 (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether the small hit flag value (01H) is set or not. Then, if the small hit flag value (01H) is not set either and it is simply out of step (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of special symbol variation pre-processing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, when the small hit flag value (01H) is set (Step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the small hit variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (medium hit)” as an internal state flag on control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command representing a small hit. A state command representing a small hit is sent to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

  Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes special variation management processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of managing special variation executed after the end of the big hit game. The contents of the special variation management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cut counter. In the "counting counter", the respective counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time count area of the RAM 76 in the "high probability state" and the "time shortening state". Here, although "counting" is used, the value of the counting counter in the "high probability state" can be set to an extremely large value (for example, 10000 times or more). By setting such a huge value, it can be stochastically guaranteed that the “high probability state” will continue until the next winning is obtained. In addition, the value (for example, 10 times, 100 times, 10000 times etc.) according to the winning symbol is set to the number cut counter regarding the "time shortening state".

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the number cut counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. On the other hand, if the number cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the number cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements the count counter value (by one).
Step S4640: The main control CPU 72 then determines whether the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management processing. On the other hand, when the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag at the time of operation of the number cut function. It is the probability fluctuation function activation flag or the time shortening function activation flag that is reset, but the value of the number cut counter that counts the high probability state in the “high probability state” is not substantially zero. It is the time saving function activation flag that is actually reset. Thereby, the time shortening state and the high probability state are ended after the stop display of the special symbol. When the above procedure is completed, the processing returns to the special game management processing.

Special variation management process
FIG. 49 is a flowchart of an exemplary procedure of the special variation management process. Each step will be described below.

  Step S4660: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76 and checks whether the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is larger than “0” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4662. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not larger than "0", that is, when the variation pattern selection counter value is "0" (No), the main control CPU 72 has a special symbol It returns to the process during stop display (FIG. 48).

Step S4662: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of decrementing (subtracting 1) the variation pattern selection counter value. As a result, the number of times the special variation is performed (the number of executable special variations) is reduced by one.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display processing (FIG. 48).

[Big win variable pay device management process]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the big hit variable winning prize device management process.
The big hit variable winning device management process is a big hit game process selection processing (step S5100), a big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting processing (step S5200), a big hit big winning opening opening and closing operation processing (step S5300), a big hit large The subroutine group of the winning opening closing process (step S5400) and the big hit end process (step S5500) is included.

  Step S5100: In the jackpot gaming process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the big hit variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process to select as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, in a situation where the operation (opening and closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit time big winning opening open pattern setting processing as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big hit big winning opening opening and closing operation processing (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the big hit opening big winning opening If the operation processing has been completed, then the jackpot winning prize closing operation (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big hit big winning opening / closing operation process and the big hit big winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs a big hit finish process (the next jump destination) Step S5500) is selected. Each process will be described in more detail below.

[Big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting processing]
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a big hit big winning opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times of opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit, and the time of each opening. Each step will be described below.

  Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes an opening pattern setting process by symbol. In this process, the main control CPU72 according to the corresponding winning symbol of this time opening pattern of the large winning opening (opening number and the opening time of each round), the interval time between rounds, the number of counts in one round (maximum Number of winnings), opening time, ending time etc. are set. Although the number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is basically about 10, there is almost no chance that winning will occur during the opening of an extremely short time (about 0.1 second) (impossible) Not very difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current big hit game based on the big hit winning symbol selected in the previous big hit stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 34). Specifically, if “15 round big hit” is selected as the type of big hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 15 times. Further, if “3 round big hit” is selected as the type of big hit, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 3 times. The number of execution rounds set here is stored, for example, in the buffer area of the RAM 76.

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The value of the timer set here is the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. In addition, if about 29.0 seconds are set as the value of the big hit opening timer, the opening time is a sufficient time for entering the big winning opening easily during one opening (for example, the firing control) It is a time during which ten or more gaming balls are fired by the substrate set 174 (preferably six seconds or more). On the other hand, if 0.1 second is set as the value of the timer, the opening time is a short time that hardly occurs (it becomes difficult) even if it is impossible to enter the big winning opening during one opening. (For example, a time shorter than one second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game balls by the launch control board set 174).

  Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets a special winning opening interval timer based on the special winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time between the big hit rounds.

  Step S5212: After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit large winning opening / closing operation process, and returns to the big hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 50).

[Big hit big winning opening opening and closing operation processing]
FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a big hit big winning opening / closing operation process. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

  Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special winning opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, whether or not the special winning opening interval timer is counting down may be confirmed by checking whether or not the special winning opening interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already in operation. it can.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the special winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the special winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the first large winning opening solenoid 90 or the second large winning opening solenoid 97 is generated based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit. Thereby, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

  When the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened, the main control CPU 72 generates a first large winning opening opening command or a second large winning opening opening command. The first large winning opening opening command and the second large winning opening opening command are transmitted to the effect control device 124.

  Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. In this process, the release timer countdown set in the previous big hit time special winning opening open pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 51) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special winning opening open time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5308. Run.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of gaming balls that have won in the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning opening during opening or the second large winning opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). The predetermined number defines the upper limit (upper limit of winning balls) of the number of winning balls allowed per opening (one round during a big hit) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management processing. Then, when the big hit variable winning prize device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is currently set to the big hit big winning opening opening / closing operation process at the current stage, the main control CPU 72 executes the procedure of steps S5301 to S5310 above. Execute repeatedly.

  If it is determined in step S5306 above that the special winning opening open time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count number has reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 performs step S5312 next. Run.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening. Specifically, the generation of the drive signal for applying to the first large winning opening solenoid 90 or the second large winning opening solenoid 97 is ended. Thereby, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

  When the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is closed, the main control CPU 72 generates a first large winning opening closing command or a second large winning opening closing command. The first big winning opening closing command and the second big winning opening closing command are transmitted to the effect control device 124.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval timer countdown processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the special winning opening interval timer set in the above-mentioned big hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 51).

  Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special winning opening interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the special winning opening interval timer after countdown processing is 0 or less, and if the value of the special winning opening interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 50). When the big hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S5301 and immediately executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the special winning opening interval timer after the countdown processing becomes 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. The value of the release number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with an initial value of 0.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the release number counter after increment has reached the number set in the current round. Here, the reason why "the number of times set in the current round" is determined is, for example, "make the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 open more than once in one round during a big hit" This is to cope with the open pattern of

  When a pattern of repeating opening and closing operations in one round is not adopted, the “number of times set in the current round” in each round is set once in each round. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322 since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening and closing operation in each round (Yes).

  On the other hand, in the case where a pattern in which the opening and closing operations are repeated a plurality of times in one round is adopted, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No).

  In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the big hit variable winning prize device management process, the jump destination is currently set to the big hit big win opening / closing operation process at the current stage, so the procedure from step S5301 to step S5320 Execute repeatedly. As a result, incrementing of the release number counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit large winning opening closing process, and returns to the big hit variable winning apparatus management process. Then, when the big hit variable winning prize device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes a big hit big winning hole closing process.

[Big win time big prize mouth closing processing]
FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big hit big winning hole closing process. The big hit big winning hole closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the above round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter becomes “1” at the stage when the first round is finished and the second round is started.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the round number counter after increment (1 to 15), and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after one subtraction) (No) Then, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current value of the round number counter. The number-of-rounds command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process. The effect control device 124 can check the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination as the big hit large winning opening opening and closing operation processing.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management processing.

  Next, when the main control CPU 72 executes the big hit variable winning prize apparatus management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the next hit target big hit time big winning opening opening / closing operation process in the big hit time game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 50). Run. Then, after execution of the big hit large winning opening opening and closing operation processing, through the execution of the big hit large winning opening closing processing, the main control CPU 72 executes the big hitting large winning opening closing processing again, the above step S5402 to step S5408 Execute repeatedly. Thus, the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (15 times etc.).

  If the actual number of rounds has reached the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5410 next.

  Steps S5410 and S5412: In this case, when the round number counter is reset (= 0), the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination as the big hit end process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management processing. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the big hit variable winning prize device management process, the big hit end process is selected this time.

[Big hit end processing]
FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big hit end process. This big hit end process is for adjusting the condition when the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit is finished. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value to the big hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) as time passes.

  Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit end time timer has not yet become 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends the present module and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 50).

  Thereafter, when the value of the big hit end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

  Steps S5503 and S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag here, and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control process. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit and other setting process (step S 2414 in FIG. 34) during the special symbol variation pre-processing.

  Step S5508: If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set (step S5506: YES), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of probability variations (for example, 10000 times). The value of the set number of probability fluctuations is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76, and becomes the above-mentioned number cut counter value. The probability fluctuation number set here is the upper limit number of times to perform fluctuation of the special symbol (internal lottery) in the high probability state in the subsequent games. However, when an enormous number of times of about 10,000 times is set as described above, there is almost no probability that non-winning will continue to that point (the winning probability at high probability is, for example, 1/32 to 1/100. Degree), substantially, the high probability state will continue until the next winning. On the contrary, in the case where the high probability state has a substantial upper limit, the number of probability fluctuations is set to a practical number (for example, about 70) (so-called truncation probability variation). If the value of the probability variation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the time shortening function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit and other setting process (step S 2414 in FIG. 34) during the special symbol variation pre-processing.

  Step S5512: Then, if the value of the time shortening function activation flag is set (step S5510: YES), the main control CPU 72 sets the time reduction number (for example, 10 times, 100 times or 10000 times). The value of the set number of times is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: NO), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, in response to the resetting of the jackpot flag or the end of the winning combination, a state designation command representing "normally medium" is generated as the gaming state. In addition, if the probability variation function activation flag is set, a state specification command representing "in high probability" is generated as the internal state, and if the time shortening function activation flag is set, the "time reduction in internal state" is generated. Generate a state specification command representing "." These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process.

  Step S5515: The main control CPU 72 executes special variation count setting processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a variation pattern selection counter value based on the type of the winning symbol. The contents of the special variation count setting process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit opening winning pattern opening pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 33) in the special game management process as the special symbol variation pre-processing. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management processing.

[Special variation count setting process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart of an example of a procedure of special variation count setting processing. Each step will be described below.

  Step S5600: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current win corresponds to any of “11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11” or “11 round normal symbols”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current win corresponds to any of “11 round probability symbols 1 to 11” or “11 round normal symbols” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5602. On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the winning this time falls under either “11 round probability symbol 1 to 11” or “11 round normal symbol”, the main control CPU 72 performs big hit end processing (FIG. 54). To return.

Step S5602: The main control CPU 72 sets a value according to the winning symbol to the fluctuation pattern selection counter value. The value corresponding to the winning symbol is set in accordance with the value of the number of special variations shown in FIG. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game, the special variation is executed one to ten times. Note that the set variation pattern selection counter value is decremented by one each time the special symbol is stopped and displayed once. Then, through such processing, the main control CPU 72 can make the selected fluctuation pattern a normal fluctuation or a special fluctuation.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big hit end process (FIG. 54).

[Small hit variable pay device management process]
FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of the small hitting variable winning prize device management process.
Small hit time variable winning device management process, small hit time game process selection process (step S6100), small hit time large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), small hit time large winning opening opening and closing operation process (step S6300) The small winning large winning opening closing process (step S6400), the small hitting time ending process (step S6500) is a configuration including a subroutine group.

  Step S6100: In the small hitting game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the small hit variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. . Which process to select as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. Do. On the other hand, if the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU72 as the next jump destination small winning large winning opening opening and closing operation processing (step S6300) is selected, small hit large If the winning opening opening / closing operation processing is completed, the small hit large winning opening closing processing (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process and the small hitting large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 executes the small hit end process as the next jump destination (step S6500) is selected. Each process will be described in more detail below.

[Small hit big winning opening opening pattern setting processing]
FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting processing. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times of opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit and the time of each opening. Each step will be described below.

  Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets a "small hit open pattern". In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit open pattern”, for example, an open pattern of “0.1 second open” is set for each of the first and second times. Since "small hit" does not have the concept of "round", "open pattern" is also written as "first open" and "second open".

  Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets, for example, twice the number of times of opening of the special winning opening based on the special winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of times of release set here is stored, for example, in the buffer area of the RAM 76.

  Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hit open timer. The value of the timer set here is an open time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In the present embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hit open timer, and such open time is most likely to be a prize winning opening during one open. It becomes short (it becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a firing interval of the game balls by the launcher unit).

  Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hit time interval timer. The value of the timer set here is a standby time for each opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to, for example, about 2 seconds.

  Step S6220: After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening / closing operation process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 56). Then, the main control CPU 72 executes small hit time large winning opening opening and closing operation processing (step S6300) next.

[Small hit big winning opening opening and closing operation processing]
FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a small hit large winning opening / closing operation process. This process is for controlling the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

  Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by checking whether the interval timer set in the following step S6314 is already operating, it can be checked whether the interval timer is counting down.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, if it can not be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

  Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big winning opening. Specifically, a drive signal to be applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is generated. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

  Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. In this process, the release timer countdown set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 57) is executed.

  Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the open time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S6308. Run.

  Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of gaming balls that have won in the first variable winning device 30 (the first large winning opening during opening) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal inputted from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). The predetermined number defines the upper limit (upper limit of winning balls) of the number of winning balls allowed per opening (one opening at the small hit) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning prize apparatus management process (FIG. 56). Then, when the small hit variable winning prize device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the small hit time large winning opening opening / closing operation process at the current stage, the main control CPU 72 executes the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the procedure.

  If it is determined in step S6306 that the release time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count number has reached the predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set to a short time, the main control CPU 72 usually proceeds to step S6310 before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number at the time of small hit. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the opening time has ended.

  Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big winning opening. Specifically, the generation of the drive signal for applying to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is ended. Thereby, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval timer countdown processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the above-mentioned small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 57).

  Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown processing is 0 or less is checked. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable at the time of small hit. The end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 56) is restored. When the small hit large winning opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the first step S6301 and immediately executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown processing becomes 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

  Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening closing process, and returns to the small hit variable winning apparatus management process. Then, when the small hitting variable winning prize device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes the small hitting big winning hole closing process.

[Small hit big winning opening closing process]
FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the small hit large winning opening closing process. The small hit large winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

  Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

  Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the release number counter after increment has reached the set release number. The number of times of opening is set in the previous special winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 57). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to small hit time large winning opening opening and closing operation processing.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the small hitting variable winning device management process (FIG. 56).

  Next, when the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the small jump large winning opening opening and closing operation process which is the next jump destination in the small hitting game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 56). Run. Then, after executing the small hit large winning opening opening and closing operation processing, the main control CPU 72 executes the small hitting large winning opening closing processing again, and until the actual opening number reaches the set opening number (twice) The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

  If the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit has reached the set number of times of opening (step S6414: YES), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6418 next.

  Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the open number counter (= 0), the next jump destination is set as the small hit end process.

  Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter, and returns to the small hitting variable winning device management process (FIG. 56). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hit time end process is selected this time.

[Small hit time end processing]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart of an example of a small hit end process. The small hit time end process is for adjusting the condition when the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the small hit time is ended. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value to the small hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer (each call of this module) as time passes.

  Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the small hit time end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hit end time timer is not yet zero, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends the present module and returns to the small hit variable winning prize device management process (FIG. 56).

  After that, when the value of the small hitting end time timer becomes 0 with the lapse of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

  Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and deletes "small hit" from the internal state flag to end the small hit game. In the case of a big hit, the internal condition device operates (for example, the flag corresponding to the condition device is turned ON), but in the case of a small hit, such an internal condition device does not operate. The procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 33) in the special game management process as the special symbol variation pre-processing. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning prize device management process.

[LED display setting process]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the LED display setting process.
The LED display setting process is the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), the state display setting process (step S1220), the operation memory display setting process (step S1230), the continuous operation number display setting The configuration includes a subroutine group of the process (step S1240).

  Among them, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210) and the operation storage display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, and the ordinary In processing to generate drive signal (common output data) to be applied to each LED of symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is there. The generated data for common output (display data) is stored in the RAM of the use area and is output in the dynamic port output process (the same applies hereinafter).

  The state display setting process (step S 1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S 1240) are processes for generating drive signals (common output data) to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d and the time shortening state display lamp 38e according to the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag or the time shortening function operation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set to the probability fluctuation function activation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting signal (common output data) for the LED corresponding to the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d. Generate In addition, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d keeps on lighting until the jackpot game regarding the special symbol is started, or until the probability fluctuation function is turned off after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed a prescribed number of times, and then it is not The display is switched (off). In addition, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d does not light when it shifts to the latent probability change state (high probability non-time shortening state), but a power cut-off state occurs in the latent probability change state and the power supply is not cleared. Lights up when recovered. On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function activation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal (common) for the LED corresponding to the time saving status indicator 38e regardless of whether the power is turned on or not. Generate output data). Further, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the firing position designation lamp 38f in accordance with the firing position designation status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by a big hit game or a small hit game (when the launch position designation status is set to “1”), the main control CPU 72 fires A lighting signal (common output data) for LED corresponding to the position designation lamp 38f is generated. On the other hand, when it is in the normal game in the low probability non-time shortening state (when the launch position designation status is set to “0”), the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f ( Does not generate common output data). Also, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function activation flag, the main control CPU72 in addition to the above time saving status indicator lamp 38e, the lighting signal (for common output) for the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f Generate data). It should be noted that the launch position specification lamp 38f lights up from the start of the big hit game until the end of the "time reduced state" when shifting to the "time reduced state" after the big hit game, and is not lighted by the end of the "time reduced state" It becomes OFF).

The probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d can adopt any of the following lighting methods.
(1) The first lighting method is mainly used for models equipped with the function of latent probability change, and does not light even in the probability fluctuation state (high probability state), and is the probability fluctuation state at power on It is a method to make it light when it For example, when there is a latent certainty change state, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d can not be turned on when it shifts to the latent certainty change state, and it is lighted even during the certainty change (high probability time reduction state) It can not be done.
(2) The second lighting method is a method mainly used for a model not equipped with the function of latent probability variation, and is a lighting method for lighting in the case of a probability fluctuation state.
As these lighting methods, one of the lighting methods can be adopted depending on the specification of the model of the gaming machine and the like.

  Further, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a, 38b and 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 generates lighting signals (common output data) for the big hit type display lamps 38a, 38b and 38c based on the value of the above-mentioned status of continuous operation frequency. At this time, it is the combination of the display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the status of continuous operation frequency that is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation number status designates "15 rounds", the main control CPU 72 controls the lamps corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "15 rounds" (for example, all display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c). A lighting signal (common output data) for the lamp) is generated. In addition, if the value of the continuous operation number status designates "three rounds", the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting signal (common output) for the lamp (for example, only the lamp 38a) corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "three rounds". Data) is generated. Since six lighting patterns can be displayed by the three display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c, it is possible to correspond to the six types of jackpots of the present embodiment. The details of the lighting pattern corresponding to the number of rounds are preferably displayed around the display lamps 38a, 38b and 38c in order to be clearly transmitted to the player.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart of a first procedure example of an addition number calculation process. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

Step S602: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the normal winning ball addition number, the normal out addition number, and the total out addition number.
The normal winning ball addition number is a variable indicating a value to be added to the normal winning ball number. The normal out addition number is a variable indicating a value to be added to the normal out number. The total out addition number is a variable indicating a value to be added to the total out number.

  Step S604: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the out switch 99.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal is input (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S606. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the detection signal has been input (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S608.

  Step S606: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding one to the total out addition number. For example, when the value of the total out addition number is “0”, the value of the total out addition number is “1”.

  Step S608: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to load the special game management phase. The value of the special game management phase will be described later.

  Step S610: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot is in progress. Whether or not the jackpot is in progress can be confirmed by the value of the special game management phase (in the jackpot: special game management phase = "03H" to "07H").

  As a result, when it is confirmed that a big hit is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22). On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the jackpot is in progress (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S612.

  Step S612: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the time is short. Whether the time is short can be confirmed by the time shortening function activation flag.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the time is short (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22). On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the time is short (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S614.

  Step S614: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a right-handed command is being issued. Whether the right-handed command is being issued can be confirmed by the launch position designation status.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the right-handed command is being issued (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22). On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the right hitting instruction is being issued (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S616.

  By executing the process of step S614, the main control CPU 72 can determine whether to calculate the base based on the content of the firing position designation status (based on the content of determination by the firing position determination unit) (Base calculation execution decision means).

  In addition, by executing the processing of step S610 to step S614, the main control CPU 72 should be firing the game ball in the second game area when the big hit game is being executed, when the time is shortened, or If it is determined that there is any, it can be determined that the base is not calculated (base calculation executability determining means).

  Furthermore, by executing the processing of step S610 to step S614, the main control CPU 72 should not fire the game ball in the first game area if the big hit game is not being executed, if it is in the non-time shortened state or If it is determined that there is any, it can be determined to calculate the base (base calculation executability determining means).

  Step S616: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the out switch 99.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal is input (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S618. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the detection signal has been input (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S620.

  Step S618: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding one to the normal out addition number. For example, when the value of the normal out addition number is “0”, the value of the normal out addition number is “1”.

  Step S620: Whether the main control CPU 72 receives a detection signal from each winning opening switch (for example, the medium starting winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first winning opening switch 86, the second winning opening switch 81) Check if it is not.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal is input (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S622. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the detection signal has been input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

Step S622: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding all the winning balls numbers generated in the current interruption to the normal winning ball adding number.
For example, the value of the normal out addition number is "0", and with this interruption, the middle start winning opening 26 (medium starting winning opening switch 80: number of winning balls = 4), right start winning opening 28a (right start winning combination) When one game ball enters each of the mouth switch 82: prize ball number = 1) and the normal winning opening 22 (the first prize hole switch 86: prize ball number = 3), the value of the number of normal out addition numbers Becomes “8 (= 4 + 1 + 3)”. The winning ball target switch and the winning ball number are determined based on the winning ball number data stored in the use area. Since the switches for the winning balls and the number of winning balls may differ depending on the model, this processing is processing dependent on the model.

  When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart of a second procedure example of the addition number calculation process. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example. Note that any one of the procedure examples can be adopted for the first procedure example and the second procedure example.

  Step S630: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the out switch 99.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal is input from the out switch 99 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S631. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the detection signal has been input from the out switch 99 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S632.

  Step S631: The main control CPU 72, when confirming that the detection signal is inputted from the out switch 99, sets “1” to the number of fired balls B (total out addition number).

  Step S632: If the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the detection signal is input from the out switch 99, the main control CPU 72 sets “0” to the number of fired balls B (total out addition number).

  Step S633: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the gaming state is a specific gaming state. The reason for determining whether or not it is a specific gaming state is that in the specific gaming state, it does not count the number of fired balls A and the number of acquired balls which are the basis of the calculation of the base.

  Here, the specific gaming state can include at least one state among (1) during a big hit, (2) time and time, and (3) right hitting instruction. In addition, the reason for including "(3) Right in commanding" is that the specific gaming state is "under small hitting rush state (while simultaneously adopting the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the second In the condition that small hits occur frequently due to the variation of the special symbol, that is, high probability non-time shortening state is included, and "under latent certainty variation (high probability non-time shortening state)" is not included. .

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming state is the specific gaming state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S634. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the gaming state is the specific gaming state (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S635.

  Step S634: The main control CPU 72 sets “0” to the number of fired balls A (normal out addition number) and executes “0” to the acquired number of balls (normal award ball addition number). Then, when this process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

  Step S635: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of copying (substituting) the value of the launch ball number B (total out addition number) to the launch ball number A (normal out addition number).

Step S636: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the total number of winning balls from the gaming balls that have won a prize to the winning opening, to the number of winning balls (the number of regular winning balls added). The winning ball target switch and the winning ball number are determined based on the winning ball number data stored in the use area. Since the switches for the winning balls and the number of winning balls may differ depending on the model, this processing is processing dependent on the model.
Here, with regard to the winning prize opening, it is not necessary to calculate the number of winning balls since the big hit is excluded from the calculation of the base, but when it is desired to include the number of winning balls in small hits in normal times. The number of winning balls can also be calculated for the special winning opening.

Note that “the number of acquired balls”, “the number of emitted balls A” and “the number of emitted balls B” are all variables stored in the use area of the RAM 76.
Then, when this process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the number of fired balls.
When the "playing state" is "big hit", "time reduction" or "right-handed", the value of the number of fired balls is as follows.

In "out switch detection time", "number of launch balls A" becomes "0" and "number of launch balls B" becomes "1".
In "out switch not detected", the "number of launched balls A" becomes "0", and the "number of launched balls B" becomes "0."

  When the “playing state” is “normally medium” or “deep state (latency certainty changing state)”, the value of the number of fired balls is the following value.

In “out switch detection time”, “number of launch balls A” becomes “1” and “number of launch balls B” becomes “1”.
In "out switch not detected", the "number of launched balls A" becomes "0", and the "number of launched balls B" becomes "0."

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart of an example of a procedure of performance display monitor control processing. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S640: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the stack pointer and all the registers.

  Step S642: The main control CPU 72 executes an out-of-area RAM clear check process. This processing is processing outside the area. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the RAM used outside the area has been initialized, and executes initialization processing if it has not been initialized.

  Step S643: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H” or “03H”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S648. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the setting is being changed or is being referred to (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S644.

  By executing such a process, as in the process outside the area called in the main loop, when the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to, the process relating to the original performance display monitor 200 is not performed. it can.

  During the setting change or while referring to the setting, the game can be stopped. In this case, the original process related to the performance display monitor 200 is not performed. For this reason, although “do not call processing outside the area during setting change or setting reference” may be used, this embodiment does not adopt this method because the amount of code in the used area increases. That is, the code amount of the used area can be reduced by executing the process of determining whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being performed outside the area. As described above, the load on the main program can be reduced by not executing the process related to the performance display monitor 200 during setting change or setting reference.

  Step S644: The main control CPU 72 executes a ball number addition process. This processing is processing outside the area. Specifically, the main control CPU72, the number of firing balls A (normal out addition number) calculated in the "addition number calculation process" executed as processing of the use area, the number of firing balls B (total out addition number) and acquisition A process of adding the number of balls (usually the number of winning balls) to various counters arranged outside the area of the RAM 76 is executed.

  Specifically, the main control CPU 72 is a process of adding the number of fired balls A (the number of normal out additions) to the number of normally outs (normal out counter), the number of fired balls B (total outs) to the total number of outs (total out counter) A process of adding an addition number, a process of adding an acquisition ball number (normal award ball addition number) to a normal award ball number (normal award ball number counter), etc. are executed. The details of the process will be described later.

  Step S646: The main control CPU 72 executes a performance display monitor display process. This processing is processing outside the area. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 blinks the performance display monitor 200, changes the display content, and sets the display data. The display content is changed, for example, when “0.3 seconds on, 0.3 seconds on or off (at blink)” is repeated eight times (when a total of 4.8 seconds has elapsed). The contents to be switched are "the base currently being measured" and "the base of the last 60,000 rounds".

  Then, the start of the division task (division processing) is set at the timing of the eighth "lighting or extinguishing" (when 4.5 seconds have elapsed from the display start). Thereafter, the division task is executed through the performance display monitor aggregation division process called from the main loop process. The calculation in the division task ends at the latest when the display contents change (4.8 seconds after the start of display, 0.3 seconds after the start of the division task).

  In addition, in this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating data for common output for controlling the lighting of the LEDs included in the performance display monitor 200 based on the value of the base.

  For example, if “the base of the current section is 30%”, the main control CPU 72 sets data corresponding to “bL.” As common output data (display data) in common 0 and 1 buffers, and common 2 , 3 execute processing for setting data corresponding to “30” as common output data (display data) in the third buffer.

Step S648: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for restoring the stack pointer and all the registers.
When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the ball number addition process.
Ball number addition processing is processing outside the region. The ball number addition process is called by the performance display monitor control process called by the timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S650: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding the number of acquired balls (ordinary ball addition number) to the normal prize ball number counter (ordinary ball number). For example, when the value of the regular winning number counter is "100" and the value of the winning number is "8", the value of the normal winning number counter is "108".

  Step S652: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding the number of firing balls A (normal out addition number) to the normal out counter (normal out number). For example, when the value of the normal out counter is "299" and the value of the number of fired balls A is "0", the value of the normal out counter is "299".

  Step S654: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding the number of fired balls B (total out addition number) to the total out counter (total out number). For example, when the value of the total out counter is "299" and the value of the number of fired balls B is "1", the value of the total out counter is "300".

The “normal prize ball number counter”, the “normal out counter”, and the “total out counter” are variables stored in the RAM outside the area.
Also, the values of the “regular prize ball number counter” and the “normal out counter” are used for the calculation of the base, and the value of the “total out counter” is used for the update of the aggregation interval.
When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the performance display monitor control process (FIG. 65).

FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the performance display monitor tabulation division process.
Performance display monitor aggregation division processing is processing outside the area. The performance display monitor aggregation division process is called from the main loop process.

  Step S660: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the stack pointer and all the registers.

  Step S661: The main control CPU 72 executes an out-of-area RAM clear check process. This processing is processing outside the area. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the RAM used outside the area has been initialized, and executes initialization processing if it has not been initialized.

  Step S662a: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to. Specifically, it is checked whether or not the value of the setting change flag is “01H”, “02H” or “03H”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S668. On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the setting is being changed or the setting is being referred to (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S663.

  During the setting change or while referring to the setting, the game can be stopped. In this case, the original process related to the performance display monitor 200 is not performed. For this reason, although “do not call processing outside the area during setting change or setting reference” may be used, this embodiment does not adopt this method because the amount of code in the used area increases. That is, the code amount of the used area can be reduced by executing the process of determining whether the setting is being changed or the setting is being performed outside the area. As described above, the load on the main program can be reduced by not executing the process related to the performance display monitor 200 during setting change or setting reference.

  In the game stop state, the "game stop flag" adopted in a so-called two-type machine type (game machine having a specific area) is also adopted in the one-type machine type, and during setting change and setting reference The transition can be made by setting the stop flag.

  Step S663: The main control CPU 72 determines whether the section change (whether the section for displaying the base has shifted to a new section), ie, the value of the total number of outs (total out counter) is 60000. It is checked whether the value is larger than the value obtained by multiplying n by n (integer) and adding 300. Here, n is a value indicating the current section, and 1 is set as an initial value.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the section change is made (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S664. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the section change is made (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S666.

Step S664: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for storing the value of the normal winning ball number (normal winning ball number counter) and the value of the normal out number (normal out counter) in the dedicated buffer.
Further, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of updating by adding 1 to the value n indicating the current section.

  In this process, it is preferable not to save the base value. The reason for this is that when the total number of outs reaches a certain value (60000) and the display interval of the base is switched, “normal prize ball number ÷ regular out number × 100 rounding off” is stored and the result is stored Although it is conceivable that the main control CPU 72 performs this operation, it takes too much time. For this reason, in the present process, it is an optimal calculation method to execute only the process of storing the winning ball number and the normal out number, and performing the calculation at an appropriate timing later. This is a calculation method based on the idea of “shortening the processing time in the worst case”, which is an important matter in terms of the operation stability of the gaming machine, particularly, the pachinko machine. However, in this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of storing the value of the base (for example, a process of storing the value of the base calculated in step S667 described later as the value of the base of the previous section). It is also good.

Step S665: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to clear the value of the normal winning ball number and the value of the normal out number.
After the main process, the main control CPU 72 executes the process of step S668.

  Step S666: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of calculating the start address of the division task. By executing this process, the main control CPU 72 can execute an operation (processing such as division, subtraction, etc.) for calculating a base in the division task by a predetermined processing amount (for example, 1 bit).

As described above, since it takes time to execute the division process by the main control CPU 72, in the present embodiment, the division process is performed by being divided into several times.
Specifically, a table in which the start address shown below is stored is prepared, the start address of the module to be executed this time is calculated, and the address is set in the program counter (PC) to perform division processing slightly. It's running (in pieces, in pieces) one by one.

(1) Standby process before division execution (head address of)
(2) Division preparation process (start address of)
(3) Processing to obtain the 64th digit of the quotient (start address of the)
(4) Process of obtaining the 32nd place of quotient
(5) Process of obtaining the 16th digit of the quotient (start address of the)
(6) Processing for obtaining the 8th digit of the quotient (start address of the)
(7) Processing for obtaining the fourth digit of the quotient (start address of the)
(8) Process of obtaining the second digit of quotient (start address of)
(9) Process of obtaining the 1's place of quotient (start address of)
(10) Process to round off (head address of)
(11) Wait processing after completion of division (start address of)
For example, the “standby process before division execution” in the above (1) is executed when “0” is set to the next task (next task determination status), and the “division preparation process in the above (2) “Is executed when“ 1 ”is set to the next task. By such control processing, the contents of the following division task can be executed little by little. The initial value of the next task is 0.

  Step S667: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of executing (invoking) a division task. This processing is processing outside the area. The division tasks include 11 tasks (division task 0 to division task 10), and division tasks 0 to 10 are called in order. The contents of the division task will be described later.

  By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 executes processing (base related processing) to calculate a base to be displayed on the performance display monitor 200 as processing included in processing outside the area (second processing). (2nd processing execution means). The base related processing includes at least one of processing required to calculate the base and processing required to display the base.

Step S668: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to restore the stack pointer and all the registers.
When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop processing (FIG. 16).

FIG. 68 is a flowchart of an exemplary procedure of the division task 1 process.
FIG. 69 is a flowchart of an example of a process of division tasks 2 to 8.
FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing an example of a process of the division task 9.
The division task has 0 to 10, and in the process of calculating the start address of the division task (S666), the value of the next task is referred to, and the start address of the division task to be actually executed is specified. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Here, although the content of the processing of the division task described below is described as an example in which the operation of calculating the base in one call is performed bit by bit, the operation of calculating the base in one call is completed. You may

  Further, after completion of the base operation, it may be monitored whether the value of the RAM outside the area is abnormal. The start of the division task (the start of the base operation) may be set in the performance display monitor display process.

  If “0” is set to the next task, division task 0 is executed. Although the contents of the division task 0 are not particularly shown, a waiting process before execution of division is performed. In the final process of the division task 0, "1" is set to the next task.

If “1” is set to the next task, division task 1 shown in FIG. 68 is executed.
The flow of processing of the division task 1 will be described below.

  Step S730: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to initialize an integer (variable) to “128 (2 × 64)” and save “128” in an integer buffer.

  Step S732: The main control CPU 72 loads the value of the out number, multiplies the loaded out value by the integer “128”, and saves the multiplied value as a divisor in the divisor buffer.

  Step S734: The main control CPU 72 loads the value of the normal prize ball number, multiplies the loaded normal prize ball number by “2” and “100”, and saves the multiplied value in the dividend buffer as the dividend. Run.

  Step S736: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of initializing the quotient to “0” and saving “0” in the quotient buffer.

  Step S738: The main control CPU 72 sets “2” for the next task.

  When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the performance display monitor tabulation division process (FIG. 67).

When “2” to “8” are set as the next task, division tasks 2 to 8 shown in FIG. 69 are executed.
The flow of processing of division tasks 2 to 8 will be described below.

  Step S740: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the dividend saved in the dividend buffer is equal to or greater than the divisor saved in the divisor buffer.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the dividend saved in the dividend buffer is equal to or greater than the divisor saved in the divisor buffer (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S742. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the dividend saved in the dividend buffer is greater than or equal to the divisor saved in the divisor buffer (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S746.

  Step S742: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the divisor saved in the divisor buffer from the dividend saved in the dividend buffer, and executes processing for saving the subtraction result in the dividend buffer as a new dividend.

  Step S744: The main control CPU 72 adds the integer stored in the integer buffer to the quotient saved in the quotient buffer, and executes processing for saving the addition result in the quotient buffer as a new quotient.

  Step S746: The main control CPU 72 divides the divisor saved in the divisor buffer by “2” (shifts it to the right by 1 bit), and executes processing to save the division result in the divisor buffer as a new divisor.

  Step S748: The main control CPU 72 divides the integer saved in the integer buffer by “2” (shifts one bit to the right), and saves the division result as a new integer in the integer buffer.

  Step S750: The main control CPU 72 sets a value obtained by adding 1 to the current task (the value of the current next task) as the next task.

  When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the performance display monitor tabulation division process (FIG. 67).

If “9” is set as the next task, division task 9 shown in FIG. 70 is executed.
The flow of processing of the division task 9 will be described below.

  Step S752: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to confirm whether the value of the least significant bit of the quotient saved in the quotient buffer is “1”.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient saved in the quotient buffer is “1” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S754. On the other hand, when the main control CPU 72 can not confirm that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient saved in the quotient buffer is “1” (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S756.

  Step S754: The main control CPU 72 divides the quotient stored in the quotient buffer by 2 (shifts it to the right by 1 bit), adds 1 to the division result, and stores the result in the base buffer. .

  Step S756: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of dividing the quotient stored in the quotient buffer by “2” (shifting one bit to the right) and storing the result of division in the base buffer.

  Step S758: The main control CPU 72 sets “10 (value corresponding to standby processing)” to the next task.

  When the above process is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the performance display monitor tabulation division process (FIG. 67).

  When “10” is set to the next task, the division task 10 is executed. Although the contents of the division task 10 are not particularly shown, the waiting process after the division is performed is executed. In the final process of the division task 10, “0” is set to the next task.

  Next, a display mode of the performance display monitor 200 and a method of calculating a base (base ratio) displayed on the performance display monitor 200 will be described.

FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of the performance display monitor 200.
When the gaming state is the low probability non-time shortening state, the main control device 70 displays the base when the high probability non-time shortening state and the left hitting instruction are being displayed on the performance display monitor 200. Here, the base is calculated for each preset section (for example, every 60000 total number of outs). The base (percent:%) can be calculated by base = normal prize ball number / normal out number × 100.

  As shown in (A) and (B) in FIG. 71, in the performance display monitor 200, the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are switched at preset intervals (for example, several seconds). Is displayed.

  In the performance display monitor 200, the seven segments 201 and 202 display an identifier "bL." Or "b6." For identifying whether it is the base of the current section or the base of the previous section. Further, in the performance display monitor 200, the base corresponding to the identifier "bL." Or "b6." Is displayed by the seven segments 203 and 204 as two-digit numerical information.

  For example, assuming that the base of the current section is 30%, when displaying the base of the current section, “bL.” Is displayed on the seven segments 201 and 202 as shown in (A) of FIG. And “30” is displayed in the seven segments 203 and 204. Further, assuming that the base of the previous section is 38%, when displaying the base of the previous section, “b6.” Is displayed on the seven segments 201 and 202 as shown in (B) in FIG. And “38” is displayed in the 7 segments 203 and 204.

FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining a section of the base displayed on the performance display monitor 200.
Here, from when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured to when it is installed in a hall (game hall) and a player plays a game, inspections at the time of manufacture, trial operation in the hall (operation check), etc. It will be. The game balls will be fired and discharged even during such inspections at the time of manufacture and trial operation in the hall, but if the number of balls out and the number of discharges during this period are counted, the game is played by the player It may not be possible to calculate the base accurately while

  Therefore, as shown in (A) of FIG. 72, the first section (non-target section) in which the total number of out spheres detected by the out switch 99 (total number) is 0 to 300 is an inspection at the time of manufacture, The base is considered to be the number of out balls detected before a game is played by a player, such as a trial run in a hall, and the base is excluded from the target for calculating.

  Similarly, the number of payouts paid out in a section where the number of out balls is 0 to 300 is also excluded from the targets for which the base is calculated. During this non-target section, as shown in (B) in FIG. 72, when displaying the base of the current section, the identifier "bL." Is displayed flashing and "-" is set as the base value. Lights up. Further, since the previous section does not exist, when displaying the base of the previous section, the identifier "b6." Is displayed in a blinking manner, and "-" is displayed as the value of the base.

  Then, with the number of out spheres ranging from 301 to 60,300 as the first section, the base is calculated as needed (in real time) in the first section, and when displaying the base of the current section, the identifier "bL." Is displayed, and the calculated base value is lit and displayed. At this time, when calculating the base of the current section, the identifier “bL.” Is displayed in a blinking manner while the number of out balls is from 301 to 6299 (while the number of out balls in the section is 5999 or less). Informs that there are few samples and the base is not stable. After that, when the number of out spheres becomes 6300 or more (the number of out spheres in the section becomes 6000 or more), the identifier “bL.” Is lit and displayed, and there are many samples when calculating the base of the current section , To inform that the base is stable.

  In addition, since the previous section does not exist in the first section, when displaying the base of the previous section, the identifier "b6." Is displayed flickering and "-" is lit as the value of the base. indicate.

  In addition, in the second interval where the out sphere number is 60301 to 120300, the base is calculated as needed (in real time) as in the first interval, and the out sphere number is displayed when displaying the base of the current interval In response to this, the identifier "bL." Is displayed in a lit or blinking manner, and the calculated base is displayed. Also, when displaying the base of the previous section in the second section, the identifier "b6." Is lit and displayed, and the final base of the first section is lit and displayed.

  In this way, the base calculated in real time is displayed as the base of the current section every 60000 (every nth section) excluding the first 300 out spheres, and the n-1st section The final base of is displayed as the base of the previous section.

  As a result, it is possible to exclude the number of balls out and the number of discharges before the game is played by the player, such as inspection at the time of manufacture or trial operation in the hall (operation check), from the targets for calculating the base. It can be calculated (displayed) accurately.

  When calculating the base, the base may temporarily exceed 100%. For example, when the first ball of the section enters the middle starting winning opening 26, the number of balls out is 1, whereas the number of payouts is obtained by entering the middle starting winning opening 26. It will be a number (for example 4) and the base will be 400%. In such a case, since the performance display monitor 200 can display the base only with two-digit numerical information, it displays that "99." is lit to notify that the base is over 100%.

FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining a method of computing a base.
Here, a method of calculating the base on the assumption that the number of balls for the normal prize is “3456” and the number of out-of-rounds is “10000” will be described.

  As described above, the base is a value obtained by finally converting the number of emissions to the number of out spheres in each section into a percentage. And when displaying such a percentage, only two decimal places are needed to the result of division.

  The process of calculating such percentage values (the process of “converting in%”) corresponds to multiplying the multiplicand “100”. Therefore, it can be expressed by the following equation: base = number of regular prize balls ÷ number of regular outs × 100. However, in the case of normal prize ball number ≦ normal out number, when the calculation is performed according to the order of this equation, the value becomes a decimal part, and for example, the main control device 70 can not perform the calculation.

  Therefore, the calculation order is changed, and the calculation is performed in the order of base = normal prize ball number × 100 ÷ normal out number (firstly, the normal prize ball number is multiplied by the multiplicand and thereafter divided by the normal out number). By doing this, it is possible to complete the operation result only with integers without performing the operation after the decimal point.

Further, in the present embodiment, the value after the decimal point when converted to a percentage is rounded off.
However, since main controller 70 can not handle numbers below the decimal point and computations are performed in binary numbers, the normal prize sphere number × multiplicand "100" and the normal out number are doubled first and the base 2 Find the double value. Then, if the least significant bit (corresponding to the value after the decimal point) of the value twice (binary number) of the obtained base is “1” (if the value after the decimal point is 0.5 or more), the obtained base After adding "1" to the double value and rounding it down to half value (1 bit shift to the right), round up after the decimal point, the least significant bit (equivalent to the decimal value) of the double value of the calculated base If the value of “0” is “0” (if the decimal part is less than 0.5), the decimal part is truncated by setting the double value of the obtained base to a half value (shift to the right) as it is. This allows rounding off the value after the decimal point.

  Specifically, in main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), the division is replaced by subtraction, and a dividend “691200”, which is 2 × normal prize ball number (3456) × 100, a divisor “10000” which is the normal out number By subtracting the number obtained by multiplying the power of 2 by a predetermined integer "128 (2.times.2 sixth power)", and thereafter subtracting the integer from "64 (2.times.2 fifth power)" → "32 (2 × 2 fourth power) → “16 (2 × 2 third power)” → “8 (2 × 2 second power)” → “4 (2 × 2 first power)” → “2 (2 power Change in the order of × 2 to 0) → 1 (2 × 2 to the 1st power) (shift 1 bit to the right), multiply by the divisor, and subtract from the dividend. Here, an integer by which the divisor is multiplied starts from 2 × 64 in the range of 0 to 99 for the base display, and is a specification for displaying “99.9” when the base is 100% or more. Therefore, it is not necessary to subtract numbers greater than “2 × 128 (the 2nd power of 7)”.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 73, in the first calculation, dividend is less than divisor, so the process proceeds next. Then, in the second operation, since dividend ≧ divisor, the divisor "64 (2 x 32) x 10000" is subtracted from the dividend "69 1200" to update the dividend to "51200" and the quotient "0" is "64". And update the quotient to “64 (1000000 B in binary notation)”. In the third to fifth calculations, dividend is less than divisor, so the process proceeds to the next. In the sixth operation, since dividend ≧ divisor, the divisor "4 (2 x 2) x 10000" is subtracted from the dividend "51 200" to update the dividend to "11 200" and the quotient "64" is "4". In addition, the quotient is updated to "68 (1000100 B in binary notation)". In the seventh operation, dividend is less than divisor, so the next step is taken. In the eighth operation, since dividend ≧ divisor, the divisor "1 (2 x 0.5) x 10000" is subtracted from the dividend "11 200" to update the dividend to "1200", and the quotient "68" is changed to "1". And the quotient is updated to "69 (1000101 B in binary notation)".

  After that, in the ninth operation, the updated quotient “69 (in binary terms 1000101 B)” is divided by 2 (shifted to the right by 1 bit) to obtain the final base. At this time, the quotient becomes “34.5” simply by dividing by 2, but since the main control unit 70 can not handle the decimal part as described above, the least significant bit of the quotient is “1 B” After the quotient "69" is shifted to the right by one bit, "1" is added to make the quotient "35 (0100011 B in binary notation)".

  According to such an operation example, division can be realized by only simple operations such as addition, subtraction, and multiplication, and by integers only. In addition, since it is sufficient to repeat the operation nine times here, the operation processing can be performed quickly. In addition, it is possible to round off the decimal point of the base.

[Setting related processing basic operation]
74 to 76 are timing charts showing the setting related processing basic operation.

FIG. 74 shows an example in which processing concerning setting reference (mode for confirming setting) is performed.
FIG. 75 shows an example in which processing concerning setting change (mode for changing setting) is performed.
FIG. 76 shows an example when an abnormality occurs in the RAM.

Moreover, (A) in each figure shows the state of ON or OFF of the power supply.
In each figure, (B) indicates the ON or OFF state of the setting key.
(C) in each figure shows the ON or OFF state of the RAM clear switch 304.
(D) in each figure shows the ON or OFF state of the setting switch. When the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are used in common, either one of (C) in each figure or (D) in each figure is omitted, or (C) in each figure and each It is possible to combine (D) in the figure.

(E) in each figure shows the content displayed on the performance display monitor 200.
(F) in each figure shows the state of ON or OFF of external information (for example, security signal).
(G) in each figure shows the content displayed on the error display (for example, the liquid crystal display 42).
(H) in each figure shows the change of the gaming state.
(I) in each figure shows the state of the switch.

[Refer setting]
In FIG. 74 (A): the power is off at time t1, and the power is on at time t3.

  (B) in FIG. 74: The setting key is turned on at time t2, and the setting key is turned off at time t6. From time t6 to time t7, the setting key needs to be OFF, but after time t7, the setting key may be ON or OFF.

  (C) in FIG. 74: The RAM clear switch is off from time t1 to time t5. After time t5, the RAM clear switch may be ON or OFF.

  In FIG. 74 (D): The setting switch is off from time t1 to time t3. After time t3, the setting switch may be ON or OFF.

  (E) in FIG. 74: The performance display monitor 200 is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. The performance display monitor 200 displays the setting value from time t5 to time t7. The performance display monitor 200 displays the base after time t7.

  In FIG. 74 (F): The external information is off from time t1 to time t3. The external information is ON from time t3 to time t6. The external information is off after time t6. The ON state of the external information may be extended to time t7. The external information may be output for at least a predetermined time (50 ms) or more.

  In (G) in FIG. 74, the error display is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. From time t5 to time t6, the error display is a setting reference display. The display referring to the setting is, for example, to display character information “during setting reference” on the liquid crystal display 42. The error display is not displayed after time t6. The display during setting reference may be extended to time t7. The external information and error display period are the same as the setting reference end period, but they do not have to match. The setting reference end period is a processing time required to shift from the setting reference end to the normal game. The shortest time for setting reference termination can be 0 ms.

  In (H) in FIG. 74, the gaming state is interrupted in the period from time t1 to time t3. The gaming state is activation from time t3 to time t4. The gaming state is switch confirmation from time t4 to time t5. The game state is the setting reference from time t5 to time t6. The game state is the setting reference end from time t6 to time t7. After time t7, the gaming state is normal gaming.

  In FIG. 74 (I): From time t1 to time t4, the states of the switches are all invalid. The state of the switch from time t4 to time t7 is invalid except for the switch related to the setting change device. After time t7, all switches are valid.

〔setting change〕
In FIG. 75 (A): the power is off at time t1, and the power is on at time t3.

  (B) in FIG. 75: The setting key is turned on at time t2, and the setting key is turned off at time t6. From time t6 to time t7, the setting key needs to be OFF, but after time t7, the setting key may be ON or OFF.

  (C) in FIG. 75: The RAM clear switch is off from time t1 to time t3. The RAM clear switch is ON from time t3 to time t5. After time t5, the RAM clear switch may be ON or OFF. The RAM clear switch may be ON (may be pressed) at time t2 similarly to the setting key.

  In FIG. 75 (D): The setting switch is off from time t1 to time t3. The setting switch may be ON or OFF from time t3 to time t5. Each time the setting switch is pressed from time t5 to time t6, the setting switch is turned on. After time t6, the setting switch may be ON or OFF.

  In FIG. 75 (E): the performance display monitor 200 is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. The performance display monitor 200 displays the setting value from time t5 to time t7. The performance display monitor 200 displays the base after time t7.

  In FIG. 75 (F): The external information is off from time t1 to time t3. The external information is ON from time t3 to time t6. The external information is off from time t6 to time t8. Note that the ON state of the external information may be extended to time t7. The external information is ON from time t8 to time t9. The external information is off after time t9. The external information may be output for at least a predetermined time (50 ms) or more. The external information (security and initialization) to be output from time t8 to time t9 may be output for a fixed time (50 ms) or more, and there is a possibility that the external information may be continuously output depending on the output timing of the external information. .

In (G) in FIG. 75, the error display is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. The error display is a setting change display from time t5 to time t6. In the setting change display, for example, character information “setting change in progress” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. The error display is not displayed from time t6 to time t7. The setting change display may be extended to time t7. The error display is an initialization display from time t7 to time t10. The initialization display is, for example, to display character information “initialization completed.” On the liquid crystal display 42. The error display is not displayed after time t10.
The external information and error display period is the same as the setting change end period, but it is not necessary to match them. The setting change end period is a processing time required to shift from the setting change end to the normal game. The shortest time for completing the setting change can be 0 ms.

  In (H) in FIG. 75, the gaming state is interrupted in the period from time t1 to time t3. The gaming state is activation from time t3 to time t4. The gaming state is switch confirmation from time t4 to time t5. The gaming state is a setting change from time t5 to time t6. The game state is the setting change end from time t6 to time t7. After time t7, the gaming state is normal gaming.

In FIG. 75 (I): From time t1 to time t4, the states of the switches are all invalid. The state of the switch from time t4 to time t7 is invalid except for the switch related to the setting change device. After time t7, all switches are valid.
It is preferable to execute the RAM clear from time t5 to time t7.

[When RAM is abnormal]
In (A) in FIG. 76, the power is off at time t1, and the power is on at time t3.

  In FIG. 76 (B): At time t1, the setting key is OFF. After time t1, the setting key may be on or off.

(C) in FIG. 76: The RAM clear switch is OFF at time t1. After time t1, the RAM clear switch may be ON or OFF.
The setting key and the RAM clear switch may be shifted to the setting change state if the transition condition to the setting change is satisfied.

  In FIG. 76 (D): At time t1, the setting switch is off. After time t1, the setting switch may be ON or OFF.

  (E) in FIG. 76: The performance display monitor 200 is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. After time t5, the performance display monitor 200 displays the content corresponding to the error.

  In FIG. 76 (F): The external information is off from time t1 to time t5. The external information is ON after time t5.

  In (G) in FIG. 76, the error display is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. After time t5, the error display indicates that the game is stopped. The game-stopping display is, for example, to display on the liquid crystal display 42 character information of "error occurring." Or "game stopped."

  In (H) in FIG. 76, the gaming state is interrupted in the period from time t1 to time t3. The gaming state is activation from time t3 to time t4. The gaming state is switch confirmation from time t4 to time t5. After time t5, the game state is game stop.

  In FIG. 76 (I): From time t1 to time t4, the states of the switches are all invalid. The state of the switch from time t4 to time t7 is invalid except for the switch related to the setting change device. After time t5, all switches are invalid.

In addition to the basic configuration of the above timing chart, the following modification is also possible.
(1) As the transition condition to the setting change state (setting change mode) or the setting reference state (setting reference mode), the condition "the inner frame is in the process of being opened" is also set. The setting change state or the setting reference state is ended after the frame closing continues for a predetermined time (100 ms continues).
(1a) The setting change state or the setting reference state may be ended by the setting key OFF state continuing for a predetermined time (for example, 100 ms continuation) without considering the state of the inner frame.

(2) When the RAM clear switch is pressed in the setting key OFF state, the setting determined state (setting changed state) or the setting reference state is ended.

(3) The power supply recovery process is performed before the setting reference start. When the checksum or the like is abnormal, the RAM is cleared. Even in this case, the setting change flag, the set value, and the outside of the area are not cleared.
(3a) When the checksum is abnormal, the setting changing flag, the setting value, and the memory outside the area may be cleared to set the RAM abnormal error state.

(4) When the setting change or the setting reference condition is satisfied, the setting changing flag is set. In this case, the setting changing flag is set in the initial flow (for example, CPU initialization processing), and the setting changing flag is changed based on the contents of the setting changing flag during execution of the timer interrupt processing after shifting to the main loop. Execute processing of setting reference.

(5) When the setting change is completed, the process jumps to the top of the program (for example, CPU initialization processing), generates a checksum error, and clears the RAM other than the setting value.

(6) After the setting is confirmed, the game is immediately available (transition to the normal gaming state). That is, there is no condition that the RAM is cleared again after the setting is determined, or that the predetermined time has elapsed before the transition to the normal game.
(6a) For the reason such as the preparation of the effect control device, only the predetermined time may be elapsed.

(7) During the setting change, the game stop flag is set so that the process relating to the game is not performed.
(8) During main game and setting change, common main loop processing and common timer interrupt processing are used during setting reference.

(9) During normal game and setting change, the timer interrupt common in setting reference is at least one of dynamic port output processing, port input processing, external information management processing, and port output processing.

(10) During main game and setting change, different main loop processing and separate timer interrupt processing are used during setting reference.
(11) During normal gaming, a timer interrupt by the first timer (timer 0) is used, and a timer interrupt by the second timer (timer 1) is used during setting change and setting reference. The cycles of the interrupts may be the same or different.

(12) The same RAM clear switch and setting change switch are used (shared).
(13) Separate RAM clear switches and setting change switches are used (not shared).

The following is a modification of the security signal.
(14) The security signal is output only during the setting change, and is not output during the setting reference.
(15) Output a security signal during setting change and setting reference, and make the output time different. For example, a security signal is output for 30 seconds during setting change, and a security signal is output for 5 seconds during setting reference.

(16) While changing the setting, both the security signal and the out signal are output.
(17) A “setting change signal” is newly added, and while the setting is changed, the “setting change signal” newly added is output.

(18) One of the existing signals (big hit signal 4 and the like) is used as a setting change signal and is not used in the conventional application.
(19) While changing the setting, the "security signal" and the "setting change signal" are output.

(20) A security signal is output each time the setting change switch (RAM clear switch) is pressed during setting change.
(21) At the time of setting decision, output of the security signal is started. When the setting is determined, the output of the security signal is ended.

(22) At the time of setting confirmation, the pulse of the setting change signal is output for the setting number of times (for example, the number of pressing times of the setting change switch, the number of times corresponding to the setting value after confirmation).
(23) If the setting key is ON during the normal game (if the setting key is turned), a security signal is output.

[Example of processing at power on]
FIG. 77 to FIG. 79 are diagrams showing an example of processing when the power is turned on.

FIG. 77 shows a first processing example in the case where the previous power-off is in normal game and the RAM is normal (power-up flag is normal) when the power is restored.
FIG. 78 shows a second processing example in the case where the previous power-off is in setting reference and the RAM is normal at the time of power restoration.
FIG. 79 shows a third processing example in the case where the RAM is abnormal (backup flag is abnormal) at the time of power restoration regardless of the previous power-off situation.

  As shown in FIG. 77, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is ON, (1) the contents of the memory (RAM 76) clear other than the data related to the setting related process and the performance display monitor related process (2) After the power is turned on, the setting is changed, and (3) the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value.

  Also, if the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (4) the contents of the memory are not changed, (5) transition to the setting reference state after power on, and (6) performance display The monitor 200 displays the setting value.

  Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is ON, (7) the contents of the memory clear other than the data related to setting related processing and performance display monitor related processing, and (8) after the power is turned on. Is shifted to the normal gaming state, and (9) the performance display monitor 200 displays the base.

  Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (10) the contents of the memory are not changed, (11) transition to the normal gaming state after the power is turned on, and (12) performance The display monitor 200 displays the base.

  As shown in FIG. 78, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is ON, (1) the contents of the memory (RAM 76) clear other than the data related to the setting related process and the performance display monitor related process (2) After the power is turned on, the setting is changed, and (3) the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value.

  Also, if the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (4) the contents of the memory are not changed, (5) transition to the setting reference state after power on, and (6) performance display The monitor 200 displays the setting value.

  Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is ON, (7) the contents of the memory clear other than the data related to setting related processing and performance display monitor related processing, and (8) after the power is turned on. Is shifted to the normal gaming state, and (9) the performance display monitor 200 displays the base.

  Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (10) the contents of the memory are not changed, and (11) the power is switched on to the setting reference state or the normal gaming state (12) The performance display monitor 200 displays the set value or the base. In case of shifting to the setting reference state in the above (11), it is preferable to display the setting value in the above (12), and in the case of shifting to the normal gaming state in the above (11), the base in the above (12) It is preferable to display.

  As shown in FIG. 79, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is ON, (1) the contents of the memory (RAM 76) clear other than the data related to the performance display monitor related process, (2 ) After the power is turned on, the setting is changed, and (3) the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value. In the above (1), when the RAM is an abnormal value, data relating to the performance display monitor related process may be cleared.

  Also, if the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (4) the contents of the memory are not changed, and (5) the game is switched to the game stop state after the power is turned on, and (6) performance display The monitor 200 displays an error code (for example, display of “E”).

  Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is ON, (7) the contents of the memory are not changed, and (8) the game is switched to the game stop state after the power is turned on, and (9) performance display The monitor 200 displays an error code.

  Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (10) the contents of the memory are not changed, (11) the game is shifted to the game stop state after the power is turned on, and (12) performance The display monitor 200 displays an error code.

  And the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can perform the process of the content described in FIGS. 74-79 by the main control apparatus 70 or the presentation control apparatus 124. FIG. The contents of the processing described in FIGS. 74 to 79 may not be executed depending on the model.

[Launch position management processing]
FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the launch position management process. Each step will be described below.

  Step S1100: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the values of the normal game management phase are “03H” to “07H”.

[Normal game management phase]
The main control CPU 72 sets the value (in brackets) of the normal game management phase according to the progress status (1) to (8) of the game corresponding to the normal symbol as follows.
(1) Normal symbol change waiting state: "00H"
(2) Normal symbol variation display state: "01H"
(3) Normal symbol stop symbol display state: "02H"
(4) Variable start winning device (normal electric role) waiting for release: "03H"
(5) Variable start winning device (normal electric combination) open state: "04H"
(7) Variable start winning device (normal electric combination) closed state: "05H"
(8) Variable start winning device (normal electric role) during operation end time state: "06H"
(9) Variable start winning device (normal electric role) After closing Closed: "07H"

  Here, when the value of the normal game management phase is set or updated, the main control CPU 72 generates an ordinary game management phase command in which the value is reflected. The normal game management phase command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the normal game management phase is “03H” to “07H” (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1140. On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the value of the normal game management phase is “03H” to “07H” (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1110.

  Step S1110: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the values of the special game management phase are “03H” to “07H”.

[Special game management phase]
The main control CPU 72 sets the value (in brackets) of the special game management phase according to, for example, the following according to the progress status (1) to (8) of the game corresponding to the special symbol.
(1) Special symbol change waiting condition: "00H"
(2) Special symbol variation display status: "01H"
(3) Special symbol stop symbol display state: "02H"
(4) Variable winning device (special electric combination) waiting for release: "03H"
(5) Variable winning device (special electric symbol) open state: "04H"
(6) Variable winning device (special motorized symbol) closed state: "05H"
(7) Variable winning device (special motorized symbol) operation end time during state: "06H"
(8) Variable winning device (special motorized role) after closing Closed: "07H"

  Here, when the value of the special game management phase is set or updated, the main control CPU 72 generates a special game management phase command reflecting the value. The special game management phase command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is "03H" to "07H", that is, it is in the big hit game or the small hit game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1140. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the value of the special game management phase is "03H" to "07H" (No), that is, if it is not possible to confirm that the big hit game or the small hit game is being played, the main control CPU 72 performs step Execute S1120.

  Step S1120: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is a time shortening state. It can be confirmed by the time shortening function operation flag whether it is in the time shortening state.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the time shortening state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1140. On the other hand, when it can not be confirmed that the internal state is the time shortening state (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1130.

  Step S1130: The main control CPU 72 sets a value (0) corresponding to left-handed in the launch position designation status.

Here, the “launch position designation status” is a variable that holds whether the current gaming state is the gaming state corresponding to the left hitting or the gaming state corresponding to the right hitting.
Specifically, if “0” is set in the launch position designation status, it indicates that the current gaming state is the gaming state (left strike state) corresponding to the left strike, and the launch position designation status is “1 If “is set, it indicates that the current gaming state is the gaming state (right-handed state) corresponding to right-handed.

For this reason, the main control CPU 72 may check whether the current gaming state is the gaming state corresponding to the left hitting or the gaming state corresponding to the right hitting by referring to the value of the launch position designation status. it can.
Further, the value of the firing position designation status is stored in the RAM 76, and when a power-off state occurs, the value is backed up.

  Step S1140: The main control CPU 72 sets a value (1) corresponding to a right on the launch position designation status.

  Step S1150: When the launch position designation status is set in step S1130 or step S1140, the main control CPU 72 next generates a launch position designation command (launch position designation information notification means). Here, the main control CPU 72 generates a command reflecting the value of the firing position designation status as the firing position designation command. Specifically, when the value of the firing position designation status is a value (0) indicating a left strike, the main control CPU 72 generates a launch position designation command indicating a left strike. On the other hand, when the value of the firing position designation status is the value (1) indicating right strike, the main control CPU 72 generates a launch position designation command indicating right strike. The emission position designation command generated here is output to the effect control device 124 in the sub command transmission process.

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22).

[Game flow in non-time-shortened state]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the game flow in the non-time-shortened state.

  When starting a game with a pachinko machine, the game is started from the [F0] non-time shortening state [F1] normal mode. In the "normal mode", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is "low probability state". Thus, since [F1] normal mode is "low probability non-time shortening state", by making the game ball enter the middle start winning opening 26, the first special symbol starts to change and the game is proceed.

  As the [F0] non-time shortening state, there is a [F2] festival mode in addition to the [F1] normal mode. [F2] Festival mode is a low probability or high probability non-time shortening state.

  [F2] In the festival mode, when the [F3] defined condition (for example, the condition that the special symbol has changed 10 times in the low probability non-time shortened state) is satisfied, the mode is shifted to the [F1] normal mode.

  In [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, if [F4] corresponds to “11 round normal symbol” or “11 round positive odd symbol 11”, [F5] 11 round big hit game (challenge bonus) is executed, [F6] The treasure challenge effect is performed [F7] failure effect is executed, and it shifts to the [F2] festival mode.

  [F6] Treasure challenge effect is a probability change promotion Judge effect executed using the first to tenth fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game.

  [F1] In the normal mode or [F2] festival mode, when it corresponds to [F8] “11 round odd symbol 1 to 10”, [F5] 14 round big hit game (challenge bonus) is executed, and [F6] treasure challenge The effect [F9] success effect is executed, and it shifts to [F10] fireworks rush. [F10] Fireworks rush is a high probability time shortening state.

  In the [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, when it corresponds to [F11] “15 round odd symbol 1”, the [F12] 15 round big hit game (special bonus) is executed, and as it is [F10] fireworks rush Transition. In this case, the [F6] treasure challenge effect is not executed.

  In the [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, when it corresponds to [F13] “six rounds odd symbol” or “eight rounds odd symbol”, a mode transition effect is executed with a six round big hit game or an eight round big hit game , [F10] to shift to the fireworks rush.

[Game flow in time saving state]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the game flow in the time saving state.

  [G0] The time reduction state is roughly divided into [G1] fireworks rush (high probability time reduction state) and [G2] coast mode (low probability time reduction state).

  [G1] A battle reach effect performed during [G4] variation display when it corresponds to [G3] “15 round probability variation symbols 2 to 7” or “3 round probability variation symbols” in [G1] fireworks rush or [G2] coast mode [G5] The victory effect is executed, and [G6] after the end of the [G6] 15 round big hit game (firework bonus), it shifts to [G1] fireworks rush.

  On the other hand, in [G1] fireworks rush or [G2] coast mode, if it corresponds to [G7] “5 round normal symbol”, [G8] defeat effect is executed in battle reach effect executed during [G4] fluctuation display Then, after the end of [G9] 5 round jackpot game (normal bonus), it shifts to [G2] coast mode.

In addition, when [G1] fireworks rush or [G2] coast mode, if [G10] corresponds to [5 round probability variation symbol], [G8] defeat effect is executed in battle reach effect executed during [G4] fluctuation display However, during the execution of the [G9] 5 round big hit game (normal bonus), [G11] after the end of the big hit game [G11] major role promotion effect (reverse production, resurrection production, definite change promotion production is executed), [G1] Shift to the fireworks rush.
Note that the above-described game flow is an example of a representative game flow and does not cover all the game flow.

[Example of effect image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described by giving some examples. As described above, when a big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol or the second special symbol is displayed. (Symbol display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol themselves are displayed on the 7-segment LED, they have poor appeal in appearance. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect pattern is performed as described above.

  The effect symbols include, for example, three left effect symbols, middle effect symbols and right effect symbols, which are displayed side by side on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is, for example, a design of a picture tag to which a character is attached together with numerals "1" to "9". Here, the left rendering symbol, the middle rendering symbol, and the right rendering symbol constitute symbol rows in which the numbers are arranged in the descending order of “9” to “1”. Such symbol rows are displayed fluctuatingly so as to flow (scrolling) in the vertical direction in the left area, the middle area and the right area on the screen.

  FIG. 83 is a continuous view showing an example of a effect image corresponding to variable display and stop display of a special symbol. In addition, about the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (loss), an example of the fluctuation display production performed using a production design and the stop display production (result display production) is represented here. This variation display effect is a line between the time when the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but also the second special symbol) starts the variable display and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of effects that are In addition, the stop display effect is an effect representing that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the internal lottery at that time as a combination of the effect symbols. Here, first, before describing the specific content of the control process, a basic flow of the variable display effect for each fluctuation and the stop display effect adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuating display]
(A) in FIG. 83: For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to change (state not in demonstration effect), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large in the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also in the state of being stopped.

[Memory number indication production]
In addition, in the display area X1 before change of the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (the reference symbols M1 and M2 are added in the figure) representing the numbers of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. The markers M1 and M2 indicate the number of displayed memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively (the number of display of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a) The number of displayed items also increases or decreases in conjunction with the change in the number of activated memories in the game.

  Also, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, for example, as a circle (o) to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart It is displayed in the form of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are not displayed (indicated by broken lines). The second special symbol indicates that the number of working memories is 0.

  Further, during the variable display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (with reference symbols Z1 and Z2 in the drawing) is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are the "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle and right effects symbols, and are variably displayed in synchronization with the variation symbols of the effect symbols. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely simple colors (for example, a figure of “□”) with a color, and for example, it is possible to express variable display by changing the display color. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  In addition, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the detachment. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is properly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is, for example, "15 round big hit" instead of "off", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, red display color) corresponding to them. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 may not be displayed on the liquid crystal screen, but may be displayed by LEDs arranged on the board.

[Variation display production start]
(B) in FIG. 83: For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation display effect is started by scroll fluctuation of three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (effect execution means). That is, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the left display symbol, the middle display symbol and the row of the right display symbol scroll vertically (flow) in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The production is started. The markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the band-shaped pre-variation display area X1 in the lower portion of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of the change, but after the start of the change, the markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the lower left part of the liquid crystal display 42 It moves to the changing display area X2 due to the pedestal image being displayed and continues to be displayed until the change of the special symbol (effect design) is stopped and displayed (the changing display effect during the change). In the figure, the variable display of the effect pattern is simply indicated by the downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, by displaying (transparent display) the individual effect pattern in a transparent state, it is displayed in a state where the image (background image) serving as the background of the effect pattern is easily visible at this time on the display screen. It is done.

  The background image in this case is, for example, a scene in which a female character dressed in a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if it is cool in the evening. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode on presentation is, for example, the “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the time shortening function is inoperative and the probability fluctuation function is also inoperative. In addition to this, various modes are provided in effect, and background images having different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (state display effect execution means). The difference between these modes corresponds to the internal "time reduction state" or corresponds to the "high probability state". Although not particularly illustrated here, after that, for example, an image such as a character or an item may be displayed on the display screen to perform a notice effect.

  In addition, during the variable display of the production symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing its display color.

[Left symbol stop]
(C) in FIG. 83: For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design pattern first stops fluctuation. In this example, it is represented that the effect pattern representing the numeral "8" has stopped at the left position of the screen. In addition, illustration of a background image is abbreviate | omitted here (the same also after this).

[Example of effect when working memory number decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) in FIG. 83 above, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, the number of displayed markers M1 interlocks with it. It is reduced by one. For example, assuming that the number of activated memories is four by then, the oldest (oldest) stored number display in marker M1 is moved to display area X2 during change by one, and the effects consumed by the internal lottery are also added. To be done. As a result, the player can be taught that the number of stored working memories has been consumed for the first special symbol.

  Then, in the example of (C) in FIG. 83, the marker M1 at the top in the storage order moves to the display area X2 during change, so that the remaining three display areas in the display area X1 are displayed. An effect is produced in which the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted one by one in one direction (here, the left direction). As a result, the anteroposterior relationship of the change in the number of working memories is accurately represented on the stage, and the player is told that "the working memory is consumed and reduced by one" or "the working memory is consumed and the special symbol is Can be taught intuitively in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 83 (D): Following the left effect design, the right effect design stops changing thereafter. In this example, it indicates that the effect design symbol representing the numeral "3" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has been determined that no reach condition has already occurred at this point, it is almost apparent in appearance that this change is a non-reach (normal) change. In addition, we shall exclude reach change by slip pattern etc. here. With "slip pattern", for example, once the production design symbol representing the number "7" is stopped, the production design symbol representing the number "8" is stopped by sliding one design part of the symbol row, thereby developing into reach It is something to do. Alternatively, once the production design symbol representing the numeral "9" is stopped, the design pattern representing the numeral "8" is stopped by sliding one symbol in the opposite direction to the pattern row in the reverse direction, and the pattern developed to reach by this also. is there. In addition to this, for example, after the rendering design symbol representing a completely different number such as "5" is temporarily stopped, when the character appears on the screen and the right rendering symbol row is re-varied, the number "8" is represented. There is also a pattern that the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Stop indication effect]
(E) in FIG. 83: The final middle effect pattern stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning, and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the stop display effect is also performed in the non-winning (missing) mode. It will be. That is, in the example of illustration, it represents that the production | presentation symbol showing the number "1" was stopped in the middle position of the screen, and in this case, the combination of the production | presentation design is "8"-"1"-"3". As it is a breakout point, it is expressed on the effect that the current variation corresponds to the usual "dropout". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the detachment.

  In addition, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 which has moved to the in-the-change display area X2 and continued the display also becomes non-displayed. Therefore, it can be intuitively instructed to the player that "the variation of the special symbol has ended".

  The above is an example of the variable display effect and the stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed using the effect pattern for each change of one time. Through such an effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for winning and finally to clearly teach the result of the internal lottery on the effect.

  Further, although the example described above is for the non-winning case, after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect at the time of the big hit (winning), in the stop display effect, the production symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit mode. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol internally selected by the main control CPU 72 (the stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) Is selected.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
FIG. 84 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the reach effect performed at the time of the big hit (winning). In the big hit, different effects can be executed according to the winning symbol. Here, in addition to the reach effect, it is assumed that the variable display effect, the stop display effect and the notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach effect) to be executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  The following reach effects are displayed on the first special symbol display device 34, for example, after the fluctuation display is performed according to the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit, the first special symbol is a big hit aspect (for example, 7 segment LED , "Mouth", "mochi", "f", "e", "L", "mochi", etc.) until it is stopped and displayed (reach effect execution means). In addition, in FIG. 84, each rendering symbol is simplified and shown only to a number. The illustration of the markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 is omitted here. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of presentation. Also, although the following reach effects are normal reach effects, there may be cases where super reach effects (illustration is omitted) different from the following reach effects are executed according to the selected fluctuation pattern.

[Variable display effect]
(A) in FIG. 84: For example, on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the left rendering symbol, the middle rendering symbol and the row of the right rendering symbol are in the vertical direction (for example, from above The variable display effect is started by scrolling down).

[Notice production before reach occurrence (the first stage)]
(B) in FIG. 84: Next, at a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, a notice effect before reaching the first stage of reach is performed using a graphic image (picture card) of the character. The pre-reach advance notice effect is a pre-order effect in which a change in aspect progresses in stages from one step to a plurality of steps (for example, 2 to 5 steps) in accordance with a predetermined order. The design image used for the advance notice of this reach occurrence is located in front of the effect design that is variably displayed on the screen, and is displayed, for example, as appearing from the left edge of the screen (other appearances May be). In addition, "a notice before reach occurrence" here means that it announces the possibility of reach or the possibility of a big hit, before one of the effect symbols is stopped and displayed. By executing such “reach advance notice production”, an effect of having the player a sense of expectation that “the reach may be developed = the possibility of a big hit is increased” can be obtained.

[Notice production before reach occurrence (the second stage)]
(C) in FIG. 84: After the first stage aspect of the preliminary announcement effect before reach occurrence is executed, subsequently, the change of the aspect of the preliminary announcement effect before reach occurrence progresses to the second stage. Here, as the advance notice production before reaching the second stage reach, production using a pattern image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another pattern image appears additionally from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. Also, the design image displayed at this time is larger in size than the design image displayed earlier. And, the effect by the acoustic output that the character expressed by the design image emits a line (for example, "I become reach" etc.) is also performed together.

  The pre-reach advance notice production (second stage) using such a second design image is one step further from the pre-reach advance announcement production (first stage) performed in (B) in FIG. 84 above. It is an evolutionary type. In general, the term "step-up notice" or the like may be used to refer to the aspect of "pre-reach advance notice effect" that develops in this manner. Here, an example is given in which the second step pattern image appears in the notice effect before the reach occurrence, but in the effect mode, the third step, fourth step, and fifth step pattern images appear and appear one after another. It may be. Further, for example, each time the design images of the third, fourth and fifth stages appear and appear one after another, the size may be enlarged. In addition, the fluctuation display of the production design is continued even at this stage. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high probability (expected degree) of becoming a big hit in the present change by advancing the change of the mode of the advance notice generation before reaching the reach to more stages. (For example, progress to the 5th stage suggests the highest degree of expectation etc.).

[Stop of left production pattern]
In (D) of FIG. 84, the middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and eventually, the variable display of the left effect pattern is stopped. At this time, the effect pattern representing the numeral "5" is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
(E) in FIG. 84: Subsequently to the left effect design, for example, the variable display of the right effect design is stopped. At this time, since the effect pattern representing the numeral "5" is stopped at the right position of the screen, a reach state of "5"-"during variation"-"5" is generated. Then, on the screen, an image emphasizing one line in a reach state is displayed together. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as "reach!" Is also performed.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning is executed (however, the outcome of the winning has not been revealed yet). In the reach effect, only the effect pattern corresponding to the tempered number (here, “5”) is displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. In this case, the effect design may be displayed in the four corners of the screen in a reduced state.

[Prevailing production after reach occurrence (first)]
(F) in FIG. 84: When reach state occurs and it is for a while, for example, the notice effect (first time) is performed after reach occurrence in which the images representing the figure of “heart” form a group and obliquely pass over the screen. . In this case, since the image of "heart group" is suddenly displayed on the screen as it flows, this can enhance the visual appeal for the player. By executing the notice effect after such a visually bustling reach notice occurrence, it is possible to obtain an effect of making the player have a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
(G) in FIG. 84: Following to the advance notice effect after the first reach occurrence, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a state of forming a three-dimensional row on the screen, and An effect is taken that the image of the numeral is erased from the screen in the order of "2", "3", "4", etc. from the head (front). Such a rendition is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (or suggesting) to the player that the jackpot is "big hit" if the number "5" remains without being erased to the end. In addition, it is a "big hit" when the number "4" is erased and "5" remains in front of the screen, and it is "out" when the number "5" is also erased. In the case of an out of place, for example, the numeral “6” is displayed on the screen after the numeral “5” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, as the images are erased in order of the numbers “2”, “3”, “4”, the sense of tension and expectation of the player will also increase. Then, if the effect proceeds while the number "4" is actually erased on the screen and the number "5" remains on the screen, the possibility of "big hit" increases, so the player feels tense there. It also rises rapidly.

[Prevailing production after reach occurrence (second time)]
(H) in FIG. 84: When the reach effect approaches the end of the game, the image of the character is displayed on the screen as if it were divided into large shots and suddenly displayed, and that the character emits some lines (or silently) The notice effect (the second time) is performed after the reach occurrence of the content of smile). At this point, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development such as “if the number“ 5 ”remains without being deleted, the possibility of the big hit of“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”increases. Therefore, by causing the character image to appear largely at this timing, it is possible to obtain an effect of causing the player to have a sense of expectation that "it may become a big hit".

  As another reach effect different from the above, for example, there are developments such as "If the numbers" 2 "to" 4 "are erased and finally the number" 5 "remains without being erased, it becomes a big hit. When an image of a character is made to appear at such a timing, it is possible to obtain an effect of causing the player to have a sense of anticipation that "the jackpot may be closer."

[Intermediate pattern stop]
In FIG. 84 (I): The final middle effect pattern stops. In this example, the effect pattern representing "5" is stopped at the center of the screen.

  (J) in FIG. 84: Then, for example, in substantially synchronized with the stop display of the first special symbol, the stop display is also performed for the stop display effect as the effect pattern. The stop display effect of the effect pattern is performed, for example, in the state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, it is possible to teach the player that the final winning type has been determined on the effect.

  Further, if the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, since the first special symbol that is the current variation target is stopped and displayed with an out symbol, the stop display effect is performed in the same manner as the effect symbol. In this case, by displaying the numbers "4" and "6" other than "5" at the center of the screen, an effect of notifying that the present fluctuation did not result in a big hit is performed unfortunately. In addition, such an effect is performed as "outside reach effect".

[Challenge bonus production (during production)]
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of the challenge bonus effect.
The challenge bonus effect is executed during the jackpot game when it corresponds to “11 round odd symbol 1 to 11” or “11 round regular symbol”.

[1 round]
In FIG. 85A (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, a big playing effect of contents having contents corresponding to the progress status of the “big hit” game is executed. In the special role in effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed in the screen. Further, at the lower right corner position of the screen, a rendering symbol (here, the numeral "1") corresponding to the winning symbol of this time is displayed. As described above, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called "left eye") even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue teaching the player that the information "I have been won with the effect symbol of 1". Further, in the lower area of the display screen, characters of "challenge bonus" are displayed, and an image of a horse character is displayed around the screen.

  Further, during the jackpot game (during special game), character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and an arrow symbol indicating the right portion in the game area 8a is displayed (firing position designation effect).

[5 rounds]
In FIG. 85 (B): After that, when the jackpot game proceeds smoothly and shifts to 5 rounds, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND 5” is displayed on the screen, and unique during the jackpot game The effect image of is displayed. In addition, although the actual big hit game continues to 11 rounds, the big winning a prize opening is short open (for example, 0.1 second opening) in each round after the 6th round. Therefore, the fifth round is a substantial final round.

[At the end of the major role]
(C) in FIG. 85: At the timing when the big hit game is ended, a big-practice end effect for transmitting the effect contents to be executed later is executed. In this example, text information "treasure challenge rush!" Is displayed in the screen.

[Example of production of treasure challenge production]
FIG. 86 is a continuous view partially showing an example of a treasure challenge effect.
Treasure challenge production is a probability change promotion Judge production that is executed using the 1st change to the 10th change after the end of the big hit game when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation 1 to 11" or "11 round normal pattern" is there. In the treasure challenge direction, the horse character is directed to look for a treasure, and if it can find the treasure, it will rush into the fireworks rush. Hereinafter, the flow of the effects will be described in order.

  In (A) in FIG. 86, after the end of the big hit game when it corresponds to “11 round odd symbol 1 to 11” or “11 round normal symbol”, the first variable display is performed, “treasure challenge effect” Is started. In the effect pattern, the variable display effect is executed in a state of being reduced at the upper left corner position of the screen ("during variation"-"during variation"-"during variation"). In the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed.

[Game description effect]
When the treasure challenge effect is started, the game instruction effect is executed first. In the illustrated example, a character of Sennin is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an effect is produced in which the character of Sennin emits a line saying "If you can find a treasure, you are in a rush into fireworks!"

  In addition, during the treasure challenge (time saving, medium and certain variation), character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and an arrow symbol indicating the right portion in the game area 8a is displayed (firing position designation effect). The launch position specification effect continues to be executed as it is right-handed if the treasure challenge is successful, but it continues to be executed (see (C) and (E) in the figure), but the treasure challenge fails. In the case of left hitting, the process ends (see (F) in the figure).

[When 11 round probability variation symbol 1 wins]
(B) in FIG. 86: When the previous big hit corresponds to "11 round probability odd symbol 1", the number of special changes is one, so that the success effect is executed in the first treasure challenge effect. Specifically, an effect is performed in which a horse character finds a treasure. Then, the character "Success" is displayed above the screen, and an effect is produced in which the character of the Sennin utters a line "It is wonderful!".

[At the end of fluctuation]
(C) in FIG. 86: All the production symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"2"-"3") by the end of the first change (at the time of non-winning) after the big hit game is over. . Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

  Further, at this timing, an effect of teaching the player the internal state to shift after this is executed. In the illustrated example, text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed in the screen. By executing such an effect, it is possible to instruct the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the “high probability time shortening state”.

[At the time of 11 round probability variation 2-11 or 11 round normal symbol winning]
(D) in FIG. 86: On the other hand, in the case of a win with either “11 round odd symbol 2 to 11” or “11 round normal symbol”, failure representation is executed in the first treasure challenge effect. Then, a character of "failure" is displayed in the upper part of the screen, and an effect is produced in which the character of the hermit emits a line of "sorry".

[At the end of fluctuation]
(E) in FIG. 86: All the production symbols are stopped and displayed ("4"-"5"-"6") by the end of the first fluctuation (at the time of non-winning) after the end of the big hit game . Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

  Further, at this timing, an effect of instructing the player that the treasure challenge effect continues is executed. In the illustrated example, text information "Continuous treasure challenge!" Is displayed in the screen. And when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbol 2-10", treasure challenge production is continued until the special change set to each winning symbol is finished, and finally, in treasure challenge production Success rendition is executed.

[At the end of fluctuation]
(F) in FIG. 86: On the other hand, when it corresponds to “11 round normal symbol” or “11 round odd symbol 11”, failure presentation is executed even in the tenth change (when not winning) after the end of the big hit game Be done. Further, at this timing, an effect of teaching the player the internal state to shift after this is executed. In the illustrated example, character information "festival mode entry!" Is displayed in the screen. By performing such an effect, it is possible to instruct the player to shift to the “low probability or high probability non-time shortening state” festival mode. In addition, when it corresponds to "11 round probability figure 11" in high probability non-time shortening state, time reduction frequency is set to 10000 times, in the 10th fluctuation after the end of the big hit game, to execute the success effect be able to.

[Display example of fireworks rush]
FIG. 87 is a continuous view showing an example of a fireworks rush effect.
The fireworks rush is a high probability time reduction state, and continues until the special symbol fluctuates 10000 times unless a result of winning is obtained after the big hit game. Hereinafter, the flow of the effects will be described in order.

  In FIG. 87 (A): The variation display of the effect design is performed in the state of "firework rush". The background image of the fireworks rush is a background image in which "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" is expressed in order to impress the player on the motif of the fireworks. In the upper right portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed.

  In addition, during the definite change (high probability time shortening state), character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and an arrow symbol pointing to the right portion in the game area 8a is displayed (fire position specification effect).

  (B) in FIG. 87: Then, all the production symbols are stopped and displayed by the end of the first fluctuation (at the time of non-winning) after the end of the big hit game ("3"-"1"-"7 "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

  (C) in FIG. 87: When the next change is started, the second change display is performed after the end of the big hit game. In the high probability time shortening state, since the variable start winning device 28 is operated at a high frequency, as long as the player continues to hit the right, the variation display of the production symbols accompanying the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. It is often found.

[Fireworks bonus production]
FIG. 88 is a continuous view partially showing an example of an effect of the fireworks bonus effect.
The fireworks bonus effect is an effect to be executed during a big hit game when it corresponds to "15 round probability variation symbols 2 to 7" or "3 round probability variation symbols" or the like.

[1 round]
In FIG. 88A (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, a big playing effect of contents having contents corresponding to the progress of the big hit game is executed. In the special role in effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed in the screen. In the upper right area of the display screen, the characters "Fireworks bonus" are displayed, and in the center of the screen, an image of an animal character straddling a horse is displayed.

  Further, during the jackpot game (during special game), character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and an arrow symbol indicating the right portion in the game area 8a is displayed (firing position designation effect).

[The last round]
(B) in FIG. 88: After this, the jackpot game proceeds smoothly, and the final round is started. For example, when 15 rounds of jackpots are being executed, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 15" is displayed in the screen.

[At the end of the major role]
(C) in FIG. 88: At the timing when the big hit game ends, a big-prize end effect of contents teaching the internal state to shift after this is executed. In the illustrated example, text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed in the screen. By executing such a big end completion effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the "high probability time shortening state" fireworks rush as a bonus after the end of the big hit game.

[Normal bonus effect]
FIG. 89 is a continuous view partially showing an example of the normal bonus effect.
The normal bonus effect is an effect to be executed during a big hit game when it corresponds to "five round normal symbol" or "five round odd symbol" or the like.

[1 round]
In FIG. 89A (A): When the first round of the big hit game in the normal bonus effect is started, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND 1” is displayed in the screen. In the upper left of the screen, the characters "normal bonus" are displayed, and in the center of the screen, an image of a dog character is displayed.

  Further, during the jackpot game (during special game), character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and an arrow symbol indicating the right portion in the game area 8a is displayed (firing position designation effect).

[5 rounds]
In FIG. 89 (B): After that, when the jackpot game proceeds smoothly and shifts to the final five rounds, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 5" is displayed on the screen, and the jackpot game is in progress. An effect image unique to is displayed.

[At the end of the major role]
(C) in FIG. 89: At the timing (during the ending time) when the big hit game at the time of falling under the “five round normal symbol” ends (during the ending time), the special role ending effect of the content teaching the internal state to shift thereafter is executed. In the illustrated example, character information "coast mode rush!" Is displayed in the screen. By executing such a big end completion effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the "low probability time shortening state" coast mode as a benefit after the end of the big hit game. In addition, when it corresponds to "5 round probability variation pattern", during the execution of the normal bonus effect is performed major role promotion effect, and shifts to the fireworks rush.

[Example of production of coast mode]
FIG. 90 is a continuous view showing an example of presentation in the beach mode.
Beach mode is shifted after the end of the big hit game when it corresponds to "5 round normal pattern" in the time shortening state. The coast mode is the “low probability time shortening state”. Hereinafter, the flow of the effects will be described in order.

  In FIG. 90 (A): The variation display of the rendering symbol is performed in the "coast mode" state. The background image of the coast mode is a background image having a motif of images of "sand beach", "sea", "mountain", etc. in order to express the impression of healing which is the concept of the coast mode. Further, at the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed.

  In addition, during time saving (in a low probability time shortening state), character information of "right-handed" is displayed, and an arrow symbol pointing to the right portion in the game area 8a is displayed (firing position designation effect).

  (B) in FIG. 90: Then, with the end of the current variation (at the time of non-winning), all the rendering symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

  (C) in FIG. 90: Then, the next change is started. This coast mode ends when the special symbol changes 100 times without obtaining the result of winning. When the coast mode ends, it shifts to the low probability non-time reduced state normal mode. In addition, when the result of a prize is obtained in coast mode, reach production is performed and it becomes a big hit.

  Next, an example of a control method for realizing the above effects specifically will be described. The variable display effect and the reach effect described above, the notice effect before reaching the reach, the stored number display effect, the in-all-player effect and the like are all controlled through the following control processing.

[Effect control processing]
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of effect control processing executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in the timer interrupt process separately from the reset start process of the effect control device (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (e.g., several tens of microseconds to a few ms cycle) during execution of the reset start process of the effect control device, and executes timer interrupt process.

  The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), operation memory effect management process (step S401), effect pattern management process (step S402), launch position specification effect management process (step S403), display output process (step S404) And lamp driving processing (step S406), sound driving processing (step S408), effect random number updating processing (step S410), and a subroutine group of other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Also, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. Note that the command for effect sent from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special drawing destination determination effect command, a special symbol operation memory number increase effect command, a special symbol operation memory number decrease effect command, a starting opening Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state specification command, round number command, error notification command, big hit end production command, number cut Counter value command, variation pattern destination determination command, stop display time end command, winning ball content command, firing position specification command, normal game management phase command, special game management phase command, power recovery specification command, RAM clear specification command, setting confirmation There is a specification command etc.

  Step S401: In the action memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the memory number display effect and the execution of the advance notice effect using markers M1 and M2. The contents of the operation memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, or at the time of the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. Control the contents of the presentation. Further, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach occurrence, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S403: In the launch position designation effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the launch position designation effect (launch position designation effect execution means). Specifically, when the content of the firing position designation command is a value indicating right strike, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a firing position designation effect.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 sends basic control information of the effect contents to the VDP 152 (for example, the number of operation memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, operation memory effect pattern number, advance notice The effect pattern number, the change effect pattern number, the change time advance effect number, the background pattern number, etc. are indicated. Thereby, the VDP 152 controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driver IC 132. In response to this, the driver IC 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52, the panel lamp 53 and the like based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the voice IC 134 on the contents of the effect (for example, BGM during the variable display effect or reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the big hit effect, audio data, etc.) . Thereby, the sound according to the contents of presentation is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number updating process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for normal background change lottery (effect lottery), and the like.

  Step S412: In other processes, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the drive IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and performs effects in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control processing, the effect control CPU 126 can control the effects of the pachinko machine 1 in an integrated manner. Next, the contents of the action memory effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Operational memory effect management process]
FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the operation storage effect management process. The contents will be described below along the procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the effect memory number increase effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect memory number increase effect command is stored. When it is confirmed that the effect memory number increase effect command is stored (step S700: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S702 and step S703. If the effect memory number increase effect command can not be confirmed (step S700: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S702 and step S703.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an operation memory number increase effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect that causes the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be displayed.

  Step S703: The effect control CPU 126 executes pre-reading effect management processing (pre-reading effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes determination processing as to whether or not to execute pre-reading effects (marker change effects, zone effects, continuous effects, etc.), and if it is determined that pre-reading effects are to be executed, pre-reading effects Execute processing to determine the specific content of

  By executing such processing, the effect control CPU 126 is executed across a plurality of special symbol variations when the condition for executing preread effect is satisfied (when the special effect execution condition is satisfied). Can be performed (pre-reading effect executing means).

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the operation memory number decrease effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect memory number reduction effect command is stored. When it is confirmed that the operation memory number decrease effect command is stored (step S704: Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S706. If the effect memory number reduction effect command can not be confirmed (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes an operation memory number decrease effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 is performing an effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, changing the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery from the pre-variation display area X1 An effect to be moved to the display area X2 is selected. The stored marker moved to the display area X2 during fluctuation selects an effect to be deleted at the end of the fluctuation.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 91).

[Reproduction symbol management processing]
FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing an example of procedure of effect design management processing. The effect symbol management process (effect execution means), execution selection processing (step S500), effect symbol pre-processing (step S502), effect symbol fluctuation processing (step S504), effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) and The subroutine of the variable winning device activation process (step S508) is included. Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the address of the return destination. Which process to select as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, in the situation where the variable display effect has not been started yet, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol in-progress process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol in-process has been completed, the next As the jump destination of the process of displaying the effect design stop (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device activation process (step S508) is performed when the big hit variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 33) is selected in the main control CPU 72 or the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 33). When the middle step S6000) is selected, it is selected as a jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol fluctuation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 carries out an operation for adjusting the conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. Further, in this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, fluctuation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the advance effect (reach other than the advance notice effect pattern) Select a pre-occurrence alert pattern, a post-reach occurrence alert pattern, etc. In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls demonstration effects when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called wait-for-guest state. The specific contents of the process will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information to instruct the VDP 152 as necessary. For example, when performing the effect using the effect switching button 45 while executing the variable display effect using the effect design, the effect control CPU 126 monitors the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button by the player, and the effect according to the result Control information of contents (button effect) is instructed to the VDP 152.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the moving image in a mode according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the VDP 152 to execute the end of the variable display effect and the stop display effect. In response to this, the VDP 152 ends the variable display effect which has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the player can be taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) the result of the internal lottery to the effect (effect executing means) ). At the time of the small hit, it is possible to execute the stop indication effect in the same manner as or similar to the removal.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device activation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect contents during the small hit or the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the in-all-effects effect in accordance with various conditions (for example, winning types). For example, in the case of a 15 round big hit, the effect control CPU 126 selects a 15 round high playing effect pattern as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the VDP 152. As a result, on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, an image of an effect during a big game is displayed, and the contents of the effect are changed as the round progresses.

[Demonstration symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the above-mentioned effect pattern fluctuation pre-processing. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a command for demonstration effect is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demonstration effect command is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demonstration selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the content of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called wait-for-customer state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the end address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 91) and the lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 91). Do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is out (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. In addition to the lottery result command, it is also possible to confirm whether or not the current variation is out based on the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to an out-of-order normal fluctuation or an out-of-reach reach fluctuation, it can be determined that the present fluctuation is an out-of-order. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command designates a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a loss.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (unsatisfactory) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 then confirms whether or not the present variation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since the remaining is only the lottery result command at the time of small hit, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. In addition, it is also possible to check whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to a big hit variation, it can be determined that the present variation is a big hit. Also, if the current stop symbol command corresponds to a big hit symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes small hit time fluctuation effect pattern selection processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on fluctuation pattern commands (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the change pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 may select the effect pattern number corresponding to the change pattern command at that time with reference to the effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The effect pattern numbers may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  In addition, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the effect table (not shown), and the fluctuation pattern of the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern number at that time (type of fluctuation time and reach and reach occurrence timing), stop Determine the display mode etc. In addition, the kind of the production | presentation pattern determined here corresponds to "combination of the pattern at the time of a small hit" altogether.

  The above procedure corresponds to "small hit", but when it corresponds to big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on fluctuation pattern commands (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol. The specific contents of the process will be further described later using another flowchart.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms in step S604 that there is a shift (Yes), next, step S612 is executed.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes an off time fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines an effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on fluctuation pattern commands (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of the departure are classified into, for example, “a normal change in occurrence”, “time-to-day variation”, “a change in reach variation”, etc. Further, “reach change variation” defines a fine reach variation pattern. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of losing is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to the effect table (not shown), and the fluctuation pattern of the effect pattern corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (if there is fluctuation time or reach occurrence, reach occurrence Determines the reach type and the reach occurrence timing) and the stop display mode (for example, "7"-"2"-"4" etc.). The specific contents of the process will be further described later using another flowchart.

  When one of the processes in step S608, step S610, and step S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The contents of the advance notice effect are determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or not winning) or the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time shortening state). As described above, the notice effect is to notify the player of the possibility that the reach state may occur during the variable display effect, or to notice that there is a possibility of a big hit in the end. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set low when the player is not winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set relatively high to increase the player's expectation when the game is won.

  Thus, when the effect control CPU 126 wins the lottery whether or not to execute the advance effect (when the prescribed effect execution condition is satisfied), the effect control CPU 126 is elected during the execution of the variable display effect (predetermined effect) A preview effect is executed that indicates that the effect pattern is stopped and displayed in a mode (regarding the predetermined effect that suggests the success or failure of the predetermined effect) (prediction effect execution means).

  Further, when it is determined that the advance notice effect is to be executed in the advance notice selection process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of determining at which timing during the fluctuation display the advance notice effect is to be started. In addition, various types of notice effects (step-up notice effects, conversation notice effects, cut-in notice effects, group notice effects, feature fall effects, next notice effects, title color change effects, etc., are performed during the change display. Not only the pseudo continuous advance notice effect, the advance notice notice effect, the memory marker change notice effect, etc. are included.

  Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes mode effect management processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is the “normal mode (low probability non-time shortened state)”, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image in which a female character is sitting on a chaise longue. In addition, when the stay mode is "firework rush (high probability time shortening state)", the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image having a fireworks motif. Furthermore, when the stay mode is “coast mode (low probability time shortening state)”, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image having a coast motif.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent process during the production symbol fluctuation (step S504 in FIG. 93), the fluctuation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected fluctuation effect pattern (effect execution means) and various types A notice effect is performed based on the notice effect pattern.

[Big win time fluctuation production pattern selection processing]
FIG. 95 is a flowchart of an exemplary procedure of jackpot variation presentation pattern selection processing. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and loads the variation pattern command. This makes it possible to confirm what kind of jackpot fluctuation pattern this fluctuation is.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the loaded fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation pattern is the special fluctuation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S804 and can not confirm that the current fluctuation pattern is the special fluctuation pattern (No) The effect control CPU 126 executes step S806.

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process per special variation pattern. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that is a big hit in the treasure challenge effect.

  Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes a reach after hit effect selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern such as a normal reach effect or a super reach effect according to the type of fluctuation pattern (long or short fluctuation time).

  Then, when the process of step S804 or step S806 is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol fluctuation pre-processing (FIG. 94).

[Time-of-hour variation effect pattern selection process]
FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing an example of procedure of out-of-time variation effect pattern selection processing. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S820: The effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and loads the variation pattern command. This makes it possible to confirm what kind of out-of-date variation pattern this variation is.

  Step S822: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether the loaded fluctuation pattern is a special fluctuation pattern.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the current fluctuation pattern is the special fluctuation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S826 and can not confirm that the current fluctuation pattern is the special fluctuation pattern (No) The effect control CPU 126 executes step S824.

  Step S824: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether the loaded fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern after reaching.

  As a result, if it is confirmed that the present fluctuation pattern is the out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S 828 and can not confirm that the present fluctuation pattern is the out-of-reach fluctuation pattern If (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S830.

  Step S826: The effect control CPU 126 executes the special variation pattern deviation effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes the treasure challenge effect during the change of the special symbol, and continues the treasure challenge effect based on the type of the previous winning symbol, shifts to the fireworks rush, or the festival mode Select an effect pattern to be transferred.

  Step S828: The effect control CPU 126 executes an off-reach effect selection process. Specifically, based on the change pattern command received from the main control CPU 72, the effect control CPU 126 executes reach effect and selects an effect pattern to be missed.

  Step S830: The effect control CPU 126 executes non-reaching effect selection processing. Specifically, based on the change pattern command received from the main control CPU 72, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that is shifted without performing the reach effect.

  Then, when the process in any one of step S826, step S828 or step S830 is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol fluctuation pre-processing (FIG. 94).

[Mode effect management process]
FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of mode effect management processing. Hereinafter, description will be made along the procedure example.

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a time reduction state (a low probability time reduction state or a high probability time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the state designation command, and confirms whether or not the internal state is in the time saving state.

  As a result, if it can not be confirmed that the internal state is the time reduction state (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S856. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S852.

  Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the present fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special fluctuation pattern. This confirmation can be performed by confirming the fluctuation pattern command.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the present fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special fluctuation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S858. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the present fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the special fluctuation pattern (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S854.

  Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the last winning symbol is the “five round normal symbol”. For confirmation as to which symbol the previous winning symbol corresponds to and which status the previous internal status was in, the RAM 130 stores information on the winning symbol and information on the internal status at the time of the previous winning. Can be realized by

  As a result, if it is not possible to confirm that the last winning symbol is the "five round normal symbol" (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S860. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the last winning symbol is "5 round regular symbol" (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S862.

  Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the non-time-shortened state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image in the “normal mode” or a background image in the “festival mode”. For example, in the low probability non-time shortening state, the effect control CPU 126 basically executes a process of selecting a background image in the “normal mode”. Further, after the treasure challenge effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the background image of the “festival mode”, and when the special symbol changes a prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times) in the low probability non-time shortening state, the “normal mode Execute processing to select the background image of

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the treasure challenge effect.

  Step S860: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for fireworks rush.

  Step S862: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the coast mode.

  When one of the processes in steps S 856 to S 862 is finished, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol fluctuation pre-processing (FIG. 94).

[Process when variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of variable winning device activation processing. The variable winning device activation processing is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S902), variable winning device activation pre-processing (step S904), variable winning device activation processing (step S906), and variable winning device activation post-processing (step S908) (Program module) is a configuration including a group. Here, first, the basic flow of the variable winning device activation process will be described along each process.

  Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S904 to S908) from the “jump table”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the address of the jump destination, and sets the end of the variable winning device activation process as the stack pointer as the return address.

  Which process to select as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the process performed so far. For example, in the situation where the variable winning device operation pre-processing is not yet started, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. Also, if the variable winning device operation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device in-operation processing (step S906) as the next jump destination. Furthermore, if the variable winning device in-operation process is completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation post-process (step S 908) as the next jump destination.

  Step S904: In the variable winning device operation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the contents of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game.

For example, when it corresponds to "11 round normal symbol" and "11 round odd symbol 1-11", the process which selects a challenge bonus presentation is performed.
Moreover, when it corresponds to "15 round probability variation symbol 1", the process which selects a special bonus production is performed.
Furthermore, when it corresponds to "6 round probability odd design symbol" or "8 round probability odd design", the processing which chooses the special effects in moderation effect (mode transition effect) which shifts to fireworks rush suddenly is executed.

  On the other hand, when it corresponds to "15 round probability variation symbols 2 to 7" or "3 round probability variation symbols", a process of selecting a fireworks bonus effect is executed. In addition, when it corresponds to “5 round probability odd design symbol”, during execution of normal bonus production (5 round big hit production), the processing which selects the production which executes major part promotion production is executed. Furthermore, when it corresponds to "5 round normal symbol", processing which selects the production which executes normal bonus production (5 round big hit production) is executed.

  Step S906: In the variable winning device in-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information to instruct the VDP 152 as necessary. For example, when the effect using the effect switching button 45 is performed during execution of the big hit effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors the presence or absence of the operation of the effect button by the player, and the effect content (button effect) according to the result. Control information is indicated to VDP 152.

  Step S908: In the variable winning device operation post-process, the effect control CPU 126 executes the effect of transmitting the mode of the transition destination to the player during the ending time of the variable winning device.

  The effect control CPU 126 executes coast mode entry effect or fireworks rush entry effect according to the winning symbol. Specifically, when winning the game, if it corresponds to "11 round normal symbol" or "11 round odd symbol 1 to 11", a process is executed to select an effect indicating entry into "treasure challenge" , "15 round probability variation 1", "15 round probability variation 2 to 7", "3 round probability variation", "5 round probability variation" If it corresponds to the effect that indicates that rush into the fireworks rush Is executed, and if it corresponds to "5 round regular symbol", a process is executed to select an effect indicating entering the coast mode.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.
(1) According to the present embodiment, when the main control device 70 transmits the payout operation stop command (prohibition command), the payout control device 92 does not execute the payout of the game ball, so the main control device 70 and the payout Even though there are two devices such as the control device 92, the setting of only the main control device 70 prevents the game balls from being paid out during setting change or setting reference (during setting related processing). be able to. As a result, correction of the program of the payout control device 92 becomes unnecessary, and the overall control processing can be simplified, and as a result, efficient control processing regarding setting can be performed. When the setting change / setting reference start command is adopted as the prohibited command, the program of the payout control device 92 needs to be corrected, but the payout operation stop command and the setting change / setting reference start command are different. As it can be distinguished as a command, the control content becomes clear, and as a result, efficient control processing regarding setting can be performed.

(2) According to the present embodiment, in the case where the gaming machine has a function of a payout operation stop command (prohibition command, command to prohibit payout of the gaming ball when the door of the pachinko machine 1 is opened), By effectively utilizing it, it is possible to control the payout of the game balls without changing the program of the payout control device 92, and it is possible to execute efficient control processing regarding setting.

(3) According to the present embodiment, the main control device 70 transmits the payout operation stop command to the payout control device 92 to shift the payout control device 92 to the non-payable state, and causes the payout control device 92 to play the game. In order not to execute the payout of the ball, the payout of the payout control device 92 can be easily inhibited simply by the control relating to the command, and the efficient control processing regarding the setting can be executed.

(4) According to the present embodiment, the payout control device 92 can shift to a state where it can not send the command accompanying the main control device 70 transmitting the prohibition command to the payout control device 92, In this way, on the main control unit 70 side, a command is not transmitted from the payout control unit 92 during setting change or setting reference (during setting related processing), so the main control unit 70 side The control process of can also be simplified.

(5) In the present embodiment, the main control device 70 transmits the dispensing operation stop command (prohibition command) before a predetermined time elapses after transmitting the activation confirmation command, and the dispensing control device 92 dispenses from the indispensable state In order to restrict the transition to the possible state, it is possible to prevent the payout control device 92 from executing the payout of the game ball without changing the flow of transmission of the activation confirmation command, and the change of the program of the main control device 70 Can be suppressed, and efficient control processing regarding setting can be performed.

  The present invention can be variously modified and carried out without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The aspect of the effect mentioned in one embodiment is an illustration, and is not limited to the aspect of the effect mentioned above.

  In the embodiment described above, an example in which the present invention is applied to a so-called loop type (type in which a practical upper limit is not set for the number of definite variations) is described. The present invention may be applied to a type of gaming machine.

  In the embodiment described above, although the example in which the present invention is applied to a gaming machine having no definite change area is described, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine having a positive change area.

  In the embodiment described above, the first process is the timer interrupt process, and the second process is the serial communication reception interrupt process. However, the first process may not be the interrupt process. For example, the first process may be a main loop process, and the second process may be a timer interrupt process or a serial communication reception interrupt process.

In the embodiment described above, when interrupt non-permission processing is performed, an example in which interrupt prohibition processing is performed before execution of interrupt non-permission processing has been described, but in the case where interruption is already prohibited, The interrupt non-permission process may be performed without executing the interrupt prohibition process.
For example, the processes of the interrupt permission process (step S201a) and the interrupt prohibition process (step S163) may not be performed.

  In the embodiment described above, among the processing for calculating the base as the special information (special program code / special program data) to be arranged in the use area, the determination processing for determining whether to calculate the base based on the gaming state. And although an example which included information about processing of at least one side among confirmation processings which confirm a value of a prize ball number was explained, processing other than judgment processing and confirmation processing among processings which calculate a base to special information The special information may include only the information related to the determination process or only the information related to the confirmation process.

  In the embodiment described above, an example in which the present invention is applied to a gaming machine that does not employ "simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol" has been described, but for a gaming machine adopting the simultaneous rotation Even the present invention can be applied. In this case, the playability of small hit rush (playability where a small hit is frequently generated in the second special symbol lottery) can be added.

In the case of adopting simultaneous turning, for example, a gaming machine provided with at least one of the following configurations can be provided.
(1) While the first special symbol is fluctuating, the second special symbol can also be fluctuating.
(2) The average variation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be set to a long time or a short time according to the gaming state.
(3) In the latent probability change state (high probability non-time shortening state), the average fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be set to a shorter time than in other gaming states (eg, normal state, low probability non-time shortening state, etc.) And, the small hit winning probability in the second special symbol lottery is set high (if not a big hit, won about 100% or a probability close to it wins a small hit in the big hit), winning a prize in the large winning opening during the small hit game By this, it is possible to set so that the ball increases even if the big hit game is not executed in the latent probability change state.
(4) In the latent probability change state, the game proceeds in a right-handed state.

In the embodiment described above, the example of the gaming machine provided with the performance display monitor and the setting change device has been described, but in this case, the gaming machine can be provided with at least one of the following configurations.
(1) When setting is provided, setting values can be displayed on the performance display monitor.
(2) A plurality of types of winning probabilities of special symbol lottery (for example, winning probability of big hit lottery) are stored, and any probability can be set by an operation of a predetermined operation member or the like.
(3) It is possible to display on the performance display monitor 200 which probability is set (which setting is set). In this case, for example, after the base value is displayed, the setting value is periodically switched to be displayed, or a place to be lit according to the setting value (a lighting point of the LED according to the setting value) is provided. Information to be identified can be displayed.

Regarding the out switch 99 (out sensor), the following modifications are possible.
(1) Although the example in which one out switch 99 is arranged in the merging path (total discharge path) of the game board unit 8 has been described, it may be arranged not in the game board unit 8 but in the total discharge path on the main frame side . In this way, the main unit frame may be used as it is (even when it is reused) even if the game board unit 8 is replaced, so it is more expensive than mounting the out switch 99 on the game board unit 8 It can lead to reduction.

(2) On the gaming board unit 8 side, an out switch is provided at each winning opening, inside or near each out opening, and the values detected by each out switch are summed up to calculate the number of out balls. Good.

(3) An out sensor is provided on the game board unit 8 near the exit of the launch rail or near the entrance to the right hitting area, and the game ball hit in the game area before winning or out is detected to detect the out ball The number may be determined. Also, the out switch 99 may be provided in plural instead of one, and may be provided on the game board unit 8 (on the game area) like a gate.

  In the embodiment described above, whether or not a big hit game is being executed, whether it is a time shortening state, whether or not the value of the launch position designation status is “1” (whether or not right hitting is in progress In the example of determining whether to calculate the base by three items such as?), But whether the value of the launch position specification status is "1" (whether or not the right strike is in progress) Whether to calculate the base may be determined by only one item such as.

  Further, depending on the game specification, a combination thereof may be set freely, such as determining any two items or any one item among the above three items. For example, in the case of a game specification in which there is no time saving state or right hitting state, it is possible to judge only one item of "whether or not a big hit game is being executed". It is also possible to determine whether or not to calculate the base with only one item of "whether or not the big hit game is being executed" even if the state is provided.

  In the embodiment described above, an example is shown in which a value obtained by dividing the number of regular prize balls by the number of regular outs is displayed as a base to be displayed on the performance display monitor 200, but for example, the number of prize balls acquired during a big hit game is A value divided by the number of outs in the game may be displayed.

  In the embodiment described above, as a calculation method for calculating the base, the base is calculated by shifting the quotient one bit to the right after obtaining a value (quotient) that is usually twice the number of outs. The base may be calculated by the method of

  In the embodiment described above, when the lowest bit of the quotient is “1 B” when obtaining the final base, the quotient is shifted by 1 bit to the right and then “1” is added to calculate the base. However, when the least significant bit of the quotient is “1 B”, the base may be calculated by adding “1” to the quotient and then shifting it to the right by one bit.

At the time of power on, main controller 70 may cause performance display monitor 200 to perform an operation at the time of power on.
The operation at the time of power-on is a predetermined pattern of four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 (may include dot segments) of the performance display monitor 200 for operation confirmation between power-on and start of display of the base. It is an operation of lighting up for a predetermined period of time (all blinking, all lighting, sequentially lighting, etc.).

In addition, lighting in such a predetermined pattern may be performed before displaying the set value, or may be performed after displaying the set value, as long as it is before displaying the base.
Then, when lighting in a predetermined pattern is performed before displaying the setting value, the setting value can not be displayed until lighting in the predetermined pattern is ended, but when lighting in a predetermined pattern is performed after displaying the setting value There is an advantage that the set value can be confirmed early.

  Although the performance display monitor 200 has been described as an example in which the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are switched and displayed when displaying the base, the display pattern is not limited to this, and the current display It is also possible to store and display by switching the base of more than two sections, such as the base of the section, the base of the previous section, and the base of the last-previous section.

  The images listed in the other presentation examples are merely examples, and these can be modified as appropriate. Further, the structure and board surface configuration of the pachinko machine 1 and specific numerical values are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it is needless to say that these can be appropriately modified.

The following technical ideas can be extracted from the embodiment described above.
(1) The first technical idea is a configuration in which any of “normal return”, “RAM clear return”, “setting reference mode” and “setting change mode” is performed by operation.
The gaming machine is provided with a setting change device and two input devices (switches), and shifts to any of four states (normal return, return to RAM clear, setting reference mode, setting change mode) when power is restored. The four states are determined by the combination of two input devices (four combinations of ON and OFF).

One of the input devices is preferably a setting key switch. As the other input device, a setting switch, a RAM clear switch, other switches and the like can be applied.
The setting is determined when one of the input devices is turned off during the setting change. In the prior art, since the setting is determined by turning on the lever, there is no technique in which the setting is determined when one of the input devices is turned off.
The setting during the setting change may be determined by another operation (for example, pressing of a separately provided confirmation switch or other processing).

  The gaming machine has a first input device (switch for detecting the operation state of the setting key) that can be turned on / off related to the setting change and a second input device that can be turned on / off related to the setting change (pressed state of the RAM clear switch And a means for setting four states (normal return state, RAM clear return state, setting reference mode state, setting change mode state) by a combination of the first input device and the second input device.

(2) The second technical idea is that when setting values are displayed on the performance display monitor, display is performed within the use area.
The gaming machine includes a performance display monitor capable of displaying a base, and a setting change device capable of changing a set value, and displays the set value on the performance display monitor.
Further, the process of displaying the set value on the performance display monitor is executed outside the area.

(3) The third technical idea is a configuration in which the original processing relating to the performance display monitor is not performed during setting change (reference).
The gaming machine executes a first process relating to the performance display monitor and a second process relating to the setting change, and restricts at least a part of the execution of the other process while one process is being performed.
Also, the process of determining whether or not to limit is performed outside the area.

(4) The fourth technical idea is reset processing of main command permission.
During setting change or setting reference, the main control unit 70 does not set the main command permission signal, so that the command is not received from the payout control unit 92, and the payout of the payout control unit 92 is prohibited. doing.

(5) The fifth technical idea is to transmit a command indicating that the setting is being changed from the main control to the payout control.
The gaming machine transmits a payout operation stop command from the main control device 70 side during setting change or setting reference, and prohibits payout of the payout control device 92.

(6) The sixth technical idea is to shift to save processing at the time of power failure when the setting change is completed.
The gaming machine executes a first process not related to the setting change and a second process related to the setting change, and executes at least a part of the first process after the second process is completed.
In addition, the gaming machine includes means for executing processing upon power return and means for executing setting related processing relating to setting change or setting reference, and after execution of the setting related processing, at least one of the processing upon power restoration. Run the department.

(7) The seventh technical concept relates to a setting key as a switch for transitioning to the “setting change state” or the “setting confirmation state”.
In the gaming machine, the setting can be changed using the setting key, there is an insertion portion for inserting the setting key, there is ON / OFF in the setting key, and the setting key is from the insertion portion If the setting can be changed without omission and the setting key is OFF, the setting key can be removed from the insertion portion and the setting can not be changed.
In addition, in the gaming machine, when the setting key is turned off during setting change, the setting is fixed.

1 pachinko machine 8 game board unit 8a game area 20 starting gate 28 variable start winning device 33 normal symbol display device 33a normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game status display device 42 Liquid crystal indicator 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 production control device 126 production control CPU

Claims (2)

A main control device that controls the content of the game;
And a payout control device capable of communicating with the main control device and paying out gaming balls based on a payout command transmitted from the main control device.
The main controller
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game;
A setting change device capable of changing at least a setting relating to a winning probability of the predetermined lottery;
Setting related processing execution means for executing setting related processing including at least one of setting changing processing performed when changing the setting or setting referring processing performed when referring to the setting;
A prohibition process for prohibiting the payout control device from performing payout of the game ball is executed by transmitting a prohibition command for prohibiting the payout of the game ball to the payout control device during execution of the setting related process. A game machine comprising: an execution means. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The delivery control device is
By transmitting an activation command to the main control device and receiving an activation confirmation command in response to the activation command, the non-disbursable state is shifted to the dispensable state, and the main control device transmits the dispensable state. Pay out the game ball based on the payout command,
The prohibition process execution means
A gaming machine characterized by transmitting the prohibition command to the payout control device to shift the payout control device to the non-payout state and not causing the payout control device to pay out the game ball.